627856
347
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/362
Pagina verder
HANDBOOK
On-line handbook
If the "MyCITROËN" function is not available on the CITROËN public website for your country, you
can nd your handbook at the following address:
http://service.citroen.com/ddb/
Find your handbook on the CITROËN website, under "MyCITROËN".
Select:
Select one of the following means of access to
view your handbook on-line...
This personal and customisable space allows you to establish direct and special contact with the
manufacturer.
the language,
the vehicle, its body style,
the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of registration of your vehicle.
Scan this code for direct access to your handbook.
Referring to the handbook on-line also gives you
access to the latest information available, easily
identied by the bookmark, associated with this
symbol:
This handbook has been designed to help to make the
most of your C5 in all circumstances and in complete
safety.
Take the time to read through it so as to familiarise
yourself with your vehicle.
Key
safety warning
additional information
contributes to the protection of the environment
This handbook covers all of the variations in equipment
available across the whole C5 range.
Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the
equipment described in this document, depending on its
trim level, version and the specification for the country in
which it was sold.
CITROËN has a presence on every continent,
a complete product range,
bringing together technology and a permanent spirit of innovation,
for a modern and creative approach to mobility.
We thank you and congratulate you on your choice.
Happy motoring!
At the wheel of your new vehicle,
getting to know each system,
each control, each setting,
makes your trips, your journeys
more comfortable and more enjoyable.
The descriptions and illustrations are given as indications
only.
Automobiles CITROËN reserves the right to modify the
technical characteristics, equipment and accessories
without having to update this edition of the handbook.
This document forms an integral part of your vehicle.
Remember to pass it on to the new owner in the event of
the sale of the vehicle.
.
.
Contents
Instrument panels 14
Trip computer 17
Indicators 21
Adjustment buttons 25
Warning and indicator lamps 26
Monochrome screen C 37
Touch screen tablet 40
Overview
Front seats 64
Steering wheel adjustment 68
Mirrors 69
Rear seats 71
Ventilation 73
Mono-zone digital air conditioning 75
Dual-zone digital air conditioning 79
Courtesy lamps 83
Interior mood lighting 84
Front ttings 86
Mats 87
Front armrest 88
Rear ttings 89
Boot ttings 91
Driving recommendations 96
Starting-switching off the engine 97
Manual parking brake 100
Electric parking brake 101
Hill start assist 108
6-speed manual gearbox 109
Automatic gearbox 110
Gear efciency indicator 114
Stop & Start 115
Tyre under-ination detection 118
Fixed centred controls steering wheel 120
Speed limiter 122
Cruise control 125
Lane departure warning system 128
Parking space sensors 129
Parking sensors 131
Reversing camera (Tourer) 133
"Hydractive III +" electronic suspension 134
Eco-driving
Monitoring
Access
Ease of use and comfort
Driving
Remote control key 45
Alarm 50
Electric windows 53
Doors 55
Boot 58
Sunroof (Saloon) 61
Panoramic sunroof (Tourer) 62
.
Contents
Direction indicators 148
Hazard warning lamps 148
Horn 149
Emergency or assistance call 149
Braking assistance systems 150
Trajectory control systems 151
Seat belts 154
Airbags 157
Fuel tank 177
Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 178
Running out of fuel (Diesel) 180
Temporary puncture repair kit 181
Changing a wheel 185
Snow chains 192
Changing a bulb 193
Changing a fuse 204
12 V battery 210
Energy economy mode 213
Towing the vehicle 214
Towing a trailer 216
Roof bars 218
Very cold climate protection 219
Cold climate screen 220
Accessories 221
Bonnet 224
Petrol engines 225
Diesel engines 226
Checking levels 227
Checks 231
AdBlue
®
additive and SCR system
(BlueHDi Diesel) 234
Petrol engines 242
Petrol weights 243
Diesel engines 244
Diesel weights 245
Dimensions 246
Identication markings 250
Emergency or assistance 251
7-inch touch screen tablet 253
Audio system 315
Audio and telematics
Lighting controls 136
Automatic illumination of headlamps 140
Headlamp adjustment 141
Directional lighting 142
Wiper controls 144
Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers 146
Alphabetical index
Child safety
Practical information
Checks
Visibility
Safety
Technical data
Child seats 162
Deactivating the passenger's front airbag 165
ISOFIX child seats 172
Child lock 176
Overview
4
Exterior (Saloon)
Sunroof 61
Roof bars 218
Accessories 221-222
Changing bulbs 197-198, 201
- rear lamps
- 3
rd
brake lamp
- number plate lamps
Boot 58
Temporary puncture
repair kit 181-184
Changing a wheel 185-191
- tools
- removing
AdBlue additive, topping-up 239-241
Tyre under-inflation detection 118-119
Braking assistance 150
Trajectory control 151-153
Tyre pressures 118, 250
Snow chains 192
Fuel tank 177, 179
Misfuel prevention 178
Remote control key 45-49
- opening / closing
- battery
Ignition switch / Steering lock / Starting
97-99
Alarm 50-52
Door mirrors 69
Exterior lighting
controls 136-140
Headlamp adjustment 141
Changing bulbs 193-196
- front lamps
- Xenon headlamps
- foglamps
- direction indicator repeaters
Lane departure warning
system 128
Stop & Start 115-118
Very cold climate screen 220
Doors 55-57
- opening / closing
- central locking
- emergency control
Child lock 176
Electric windows 53-54
Front and/or rear
parking sensors 131-132
Towbar 216-217
Towing 214-215
.Overview
5
Exterior (Tourer)
Panoramic sunroof 62-63
Roof bars 218
Accessories 221-222
Changing bulbs 199-201
- rear lamps
- 3rd brake lamp
- number plate lamps
Boot 59-60
Reversing camera 133
Temporary puncture
repair kit 181-184
Changing a wheel 185-191
- tools
- removing
AdBlue additive, topping-up 239-241
Tyre under-inflation detection 118-119
Braking assistance 150
Trajectory control 151-153
Tyre pressures 118, 250
Snow chains 192
Remote control key 45-49
- opening / closing
- battery
Ignition switch / Steering lock / Starting
97-99
Alarm 50-52
Fuel tank 177, 179
Misfuel prevention 178
Door mirrors 69
Exterior lighting
controls 136-140
Headlamp adjustment 141
Changing bulbs 193-196
- front lamps
- Xenon headlamps
- foglamps
- direction indicator repeaters
Lane departure warning
system 128
Stop & Start 115-118
Very cold climate screen 220
Doors 55-57
- opening / closing
- central locking
- emergency control
Child lock 176
Electric windows 53-54
Front and/or rear
parking sensors 131-132
Towbar 216-217
Towing 214-215
Overview
6
Interior
Boot fittings (Saloon) 91
- stowing rings
Boot fittings (Tourer) 92
- stowing rings
- hooks
- storage net...
Load space cover (Tourer) 93
Luggage retaining net
(Tourer) 94-95
Temporary puncture
repair kit 181-184
Access to the spare
wheel / tools 185-187
Child seats 162-171
ISOFIX mountings 172-175
Child lock 176
Rear seats 71-72
Rear fittings 89-90
- rear armrest
- ski ap
- 12 V socket...
Front seats 64-67
Seat belts 154-156
Airbags 157-161
Side blinds 90
Front fittingst 86-88
- sun visor
- glove box
- mats
- front armrest
- USB port/Jack auxiliary socket...
.Overview
7
Instruments and controls
Instrument panels 14-16
Trip computer 17, 19
Warning lamps 26-36
Indicators 21-25
Buttons 25
- trip recorder
- lighting dimmer
Gear efficiency indicator 114
Parking space sensors 129-130
Windows 53-54
Door mirrors 69
Opening the bonnet 224
Dashboard fuses 204-207
Manual gearbox 109
Automatic gearbox 110-113
Hill start assist 108
Courtesy lamps 83-85
Rear view mirror 70
Interior mood lighting 84
Sun visor 86
Parking brake, manual 100
Parking brake,
electric 101-107
"Hydractive III +" electronic
suspension 134-135
Multifunction screens 37-39, 40-44
Trip computer 18-19
Hazard warning lamps 148
Ventilation 73-74
Mono-zone digital
air conditioning 75-78
Dual-zone digital
air conditioning 79-82
Emergency or
assistance call 149, 251-252
Touch screen tablet 253-314
Setting the date/time 43-44
Audio system 315-332
Setting the date/time 38-39
Steering wheel adjustment 68
Glove box 86
Deactivating the passenger's
front airbag 158-159, 164-167
Overview
8
Instruments and controls
1. ASR/DSC 151-153
2. Visual and audible parking
sensor system 131-132
3. Lane departure warning
system 128
Central switch panels
4. Central locking 55-56
5. Localised Assistance Call 149, 251-252
6. Localised Emergency Call 149, 251-252
With the touch screen tablet
1. Main menu for the touch
screen tablet 40-41, 257
2. Increase volume 41, 255
3. Decrease volume 41, 255
4. Central locking 55-56
5. Localised Assistance Call 149, 251-252
6. Localised Emergency Call 149, 251-252
With the Audio system
.Overview
9
1. Stop & Start 115-118
2. CHECK (vehicle self-test) 20
3. Volumetric alarm 50-52
Side switch panel
4. Parking space sensor system 129-130
With the touch screen tablet
1. ASR/DSC 151-153
2. Stop & Start 115-118
3. Lane departure warning
system 128
4. CHECK (vehicle self-test) 20
5. Volumetric alarm 50-52
6. Parking space sensor system 129-130
With the Audio system
Overview
10
Exterior lighting 136-140
Automatic illumination of headlamps 140
Daytime running lamps 139
Direction indicators 148
Instruments and controls
Speed limiter 122-124
Cruise control 125-127
Automatic rain sensitive wipers 144-147
Wash-wipe 145
Automatic wiping 146
Headlamp adjustment 141
Main menu - Instrument panel screen
15-16
Trip computer 17, 19
Fixed centred controls steering
wheel 120-121
Bluetooth
telephone 284, 300-307, 323-325
Horn 149
Navigation 258-271
Radio / Media 272-285, 318-323
Selection of the displayed function -
MODE 37, 256
Main menu - Audio system 38, 318
Main menu - Touch screen tablet 41, 257
Voice recognition -
MirrorLink 256, 298-299
Black Panel 256, 317
Audio controls - Audio system 317
Audio controls - Touch screen tablet 256
Steering mounted controls
.Overview
11
Technical data - Maintenance
Petrol engines 242
Petrol weights 243
Diesel engines 244
Diesel weights 245
Dimensions (Saloon) 246-247
Dimensions (Tourer) 248-249
Identification markings 250
Opening the bonnet 224
Petrol under-bonnet layout 225
Diesel under-bonnet layout 226
Running out of fuel - Diesel 180
Checking the levels 227-230
- oil
- brake uid
- power steering uid
- coolant
- screenwash / headlamp wash uid
AdBlue additive 234-241
Very cold climate protection 219
Changing bulbs 193-203
- front
- rear
- interior
Checking components 231-233
- battery
- air / passenger compartment lter
- oil lter
- particle lter (Diesel)
- brake pads / discs
Battery 210-212
Energy economy mode 213
Engine compartment
fuses 204, 208-209
Eco-driving
12
Optimise the use of your gearbox
With a manual gearbox, move off gently and change up without waiting.
During acceleration change up early.
With an automatic or electronic gearbox, give preference to automatic
mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.
Control the use of your electrical
equipment
Before moving off, if the passenger compartment is too warm, ventilate it
by opening the windows and air vents before using the air conditioning.
Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leave the air vents
open.
Remember to make use of equipment that can help keep the
temperature in the passenger compartment down (sunroof and window
blinds...).
Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has automatic regulation, as
soon as the desired temperature is attained.
Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls, if not automatic.
Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible.
Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps when the level of light
does not require their use.
Avoid running the engine before moving off, particularly in winter; your
vehicle will warm up much faster while driving.
As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices
(film, music, video game...), you will contribute towards limiting the
consumption of electrical energy, and so of fuel.
Disconnect your portable devices before leaving the vehicle.
Eco-driving
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions.
The gear efficiency indicator invites you engage the most suitable gear:
as soon as the indication is displayed in the instrument panel, follow it
straight away.
For vehicles fitted with an electronic or automatic gearbox, this
indicator appears only in manual mode.
Drive smoothly
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather
than the brake pedal, and press the accelerator progressively. These
practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and
CO
2
emissions and also helps reduce the background traffic noise.
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of the system at speeds
above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is flowing well.
.Eco-driving
13
Limit the causes of excess consumption
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the heaviest items in the
bottom of the boot, as close as possible to the rear seats.
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance
(roof bars, roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof box in
preference.
Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit your summer tyres.
Observe the recommendations on
maintenance
Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, referring to the label in
the door aperture, driver’s side.
Carry out this check in particular:
- before a long journey,
- at each change of season,
- after a long period out of use.
Don’t forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, oil filter, air filter,
passenger compartment filter...) and observe the schedule of
operations recommended in the manufacturer’s service schedule.
With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system is faulty your vehicle
becomes polluting; go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay to have the emissions of nitrous oxides brought back to
the legal level.
When refuelling, do not continue after the third cut-off of the nozzle to
avoid any overflow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after the first 1 800 miles
(3 000 kilometres) that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to
a consistent average.
Monitoring
14
Instrument panels - petrol and Diesel
A. Fuel gauge
B. Indicator:
● Coolant temperature
● Cruise control/Speed limiter information
C. Analogue speedometer
D. Rev counter
E. Indicator:
● Engine oil temperature
● Gear efficiency.
● Gear selector position and gear engaged
(automatic gearbox).
F. Controls:
● Lighting dimmer
● Reset the trip mileage recorder and
service indicator
G. Instrument panel screen indicating:
● Depending on the page selected with the
left-hand thumb wheel on the steering
wheel:
- Digital speed repeater
- Trip computer
- Navigation (guidance) information
- Display of message alerts
- Engine oil level indicator
- Service indicator
Permanently:
- Trip mileage recorder
- Total mileage recorder
Temporarily:
- Service indicator.
- Engine oil level indicator.
- Alert messages.
Panel grouping together the dials and vehicle operation indicator and warning lamps.
1
Monitoring
15
"Choice of language" menu
This allows you to choose the display and voice
recognition language.
"Choice of units" menu
This allows you to choose metric or imperial
units.
The main menu allows you to programme
certain vehicle functions* and the instrument
panel screen:
The instrument screen A is located in the
centre of the instrument panel.
- With the vehicle stationary, you can access
the main menu of the screen by quickly
pressing on the left-hand thumb wheel B
on the steering wheel.
- Whilst driving, the message "Action
impossible while driving" is displayed in
the instrument panel if you try to open the
main menu.
"Vehicle parameters" menu*
This allows you to access the settings for
certain functions, grouped by category:
- Access to the vehicle.
- Lighting.
- Driving aid.
Main menu
* Only with the Audio system.
Monitoring
16
Access to the vehicle
With this menu selected, you can:
F activate or deactivate the driver welcome
function; see the "Ease of use and comfort"
section.
F select the unlocking of all doors or just the
driver's door; see the "Access" section.
F activate or deactivate the automatic
operation of the electric parking brake**;
see the "Driving" section.
Lighting
With this menu selected, you can:
F activate or deactivate the operation of the
daytime running lamps**.
F activate or deactivate the guide me home
lighting and set its period of operation.
F activate or deactivate the directional
headlamps.
Driving assistance
With this menu selected, you can:
F activate or deactivate the operation of the
rear wiper in reverse gear.
For more information, refer to the
"Visibility" section.
For more information, refer to the
"Visibility" section.
** Depending on the country of sale.
1
Monitoring
17
System that gives you information on the current journey (range, fuel consumption…).
In the instrument panel screen
Information displays
F Turn the left-hand thumb wheel A on the
steering wheel to display the various trip
computer tabs in succession:
Trip computer
- the current information tab is displayed in
zone B of the instrument panel screen, with:
● the range,
● the current fuel consumption,
● the digital speed reading or the
Stop & Start time counter.
- The trip "1" tab is displayed in zone C of
the instrument panel screen, with:
● the distance travelled,
● the average fuel consumption,
● the average speed,
for the first trip.
- The trip "2" tab is displayed in zone C of
the instrument panel screen, with:
● the distance travelled,
● the average fuel consumption,
● the average speed,
for the second trip.
Trip reset
F When the trip required is displayed, press
the left-hand thumb wheel on the steering
wheel for more than two seconds.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use
is identical.
For example, trip "1" can be used for daily
figures and trip "2" for monthly figures.
Monitoring
18
In the touch screen tablet
Information display
F Press the MENU button.
- The current fuel consumption tab
with:
● the range,
● the current fuel consumption,
● the Stop & Start time counter.
- The trip "1" tab with:
● the average fuel consumption,
● the distance travelled,
● the average speed,
for the first trip.
- The trip "2" tab with:
● the average fuel consumption,
● the distance travelled,
● the average speed,
for the second trip.
Trip reset
F When the desired trip is displayed, press
the reset button.
For example, trip "1" can be used for daily
figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use
is identical.
F Select "Driving" to display the
various tabs.
F Select the desired tab using your finger.
1
Monitoring
19
A few definitions…
Range
(miles or km)
The distance which can still be
travelled with the fuel remaining
in the tank (at the average fuel
consumption seen over the last
few miles (kilometres) travelled).
Current fuel consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Calculated over the last few seconds.
Average fuel consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Calculated since the last trip
computer reset.
Average speed
(mph or km/h)
Calculated since the last trip
computer reset.
When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km),
dashes are displayed. After filling with at least
5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is
displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km).
Stop & Start time
counter
(minutes / seconds or hours /
minutes)
If your vehicle is fitted with
Stop & Start, a time counter
calculates the time spent in
STOP mode during a journey.
It resets to zero every time the
ignition is switched on with
the key.
This function is only displayed from
20 mph (30 km/h).
This value may vary following a change
in the style of driving or the relief,
resulting in a significant change in the
current fuel consumption.
If dashes are displayed continuously
while driving in place of the digits,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Distance travelled
(miles or km)
Calculated since the last trip
computer reset.
The fuel consumption of your vehicle
will be higher than the official figures
obtained by CITROËN during the
first 1 800 miles (3 000 km) of the
vehicle's life.
Monitoring
20
Return to the main
instrument panel screen
display
Successive rotations of the left-hand thumb
wheel on the steering wheel allow you to return
to the main instrument panel screen display
(vehicle speed), via the navigation information
screen, then the screen displaying only the
total mileage and the trip mileage (bottom of
screen).
You can display navigation information in the
instrument panel screen by rotating the left-
hand thumb wheel on the steering wheel.
This function allows you to display the log of
alerts.
F Press on button A.
The following messages appear consecutively
in the instrument panel screen:
- Reminder of the state of the tyre pressures.
- Service indicator reminder.
- Display of message alerts.
Check functionDisplay of navigation
information in the
instrument panel screen
1
Monitoring
21
Engine oil temperature
gauge
Under normal operating conditions, the bars
should be within section 1.
In severe operating conditions, the bars may
extend into section 2.
In this event, slow down, and if necessary,
stop the engine and check the levels (see the
corresponding section).
Coolant
temperature gauge
Under normal operating conditions, the bars
should be within section 1.
In severe operating conditions, the bars may
extend into section 2, the engine coolant
temperature warning lamp A and the STOP
warning lamp come on in the instrument panel.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Switch off
the ignition. The cooling fan may continue to
operate for a certain time.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
If the SERVICE warning lamp comes on, check
the levels (see the corresponding section).
On horizontal ground, illumination of the fuel
low warning lamp indicates that you are at the
reserve level.
An alert message is displayed in the instrument
panel.
Fuel gauge
Indicators
Monitoring
22
More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km)
remain before the next service
is due
When the ignition is switched on, no service
information appears in the instrument panel
screen.
Between 600 miles (1 000 km)
and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain
before the next service is due
For a few seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the spanner symbolising the service
operations comes on and a message is displayed
in the instrument panel indicating the distance or
time remaining before the next service is due.
Example: 1 900 miles (2 800 km) remain
before the next service is due.
When the ignition is switched on, the instrument
panel screen temporarily indicates:
Less than 600 miles (1 000 km)
remain before the next service
is due
Example: 500 miles (900 km) remain before
the next service is due.
For a few seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the instrument panel screen indicates:
After the message disappears, the spanner
remains on alongside the mileage recorder as
a reminder that a service must be carried out
soon.
Service indicator
System which informs the driver when the
next service is due, in accordance with the
manufacturer's service schedule.
The point at which the service is due is
calculated from the last service indicator reset
to zero, according to the mileage covered and
the time elapsed since the last service.
A few seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the spanner goes off.
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, depending
on the country of sale, the degree of
deterioration of the engine oil may also
be taken into account.
1
Monitoring
23
Service indicator
zero reset
Service overdue
For a few seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the spanner flashes to indicate that
the service must be carried out as soon as
possible.
Example: the service is overdue by 180 miles
(300 km).
When the ignition is switched on, the
instrument panel screen indicates:
The spanner remains on alongside the
mileage recorder to indicate that a service is
overdue.
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the
spanner may also come on early,
according to the level of deterioration
of the engine oil, which depends on the
driving conditions in which the vehicle
is used.
After each service, the service indicator must
be reset to zero.
The procedure for resetting to zero is as
follows:
F switch off the ignition,
F press and hold the trip distance recorder
zero reset button,
F switch on the ignition; the distance recorder
display begins a countdown,
F when the display indicates "=0", release
the button; the spanner disappears.
Following this operation, if you wish to
disconnect the battery, lock the vehicle and
wait at least five minutes for the zero reset to
be taken into account.
With BlueHDi Diesel versions, the
Service warning lamp also comes on
when the ignition is switched on.
The spanner may come on if you have
exceeded the period since the last service,
as indicated in the manufacturer's service
schedule.
Monitoring
24
Engine oil level indicator*
On versions fitted with an electric oil level
indicator, the state of the engine oil level is
displayed in the instrument panel for a few
seconds, after the servicing information.
Oil level correct
This is indicated by the display of the message
"Oil level incorrect" in the instrument panel
screen, accompanied by the service warning
lamp and an audible signal.
Oil level indicator fault
* Depending on version.
In the event of a fault with the electric
indicator, the oil level is no longer
monitored.
If the system is faulty, you must check
the engine oil level using the manual
dipstick located under the bonnet.
Refer to the "Checking levels" section.
Oil level incorrect
This is signalled by the display of the message
"Oil level measurement invalid" in the
instrument panel.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
If the low oil level is confirmed by a
check using the dipstick, the level
must be topped up to avoid damage to
the engine.
Refer to the "Checking levels" section.
The level read will only be correct if
the vehicle is on level ground and the
engine has been off for more than
30 minutes.
1
Monitoring
25
Distance recorders Lighting dimmer
F Press button A to decrease the brightness
of the instruments and controls.
F Press button B to increase the brightness
of the instruments and controls.
Deactivation
When the lighting is off, or in day mode on
vehicles fitted with daytime running lamps,
pressing the buttons does not have any effect.
Total distance recorder
When travelling abroad, you may
have to change the units of distance:
the display of road speed must be in
the official units (miles or km) for the
country. The change of units is done via
the screen configuration menu, with the
vehicle stationary.
The total and trip distances are displayed for
thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off,
when the driver's door is opened and when the
vehicle is locked or unlocked.
System for manual adjustment of the
brightness of the instruments and controls in
relation to the exterior brightness.
Trip distance recorder
It measures the total distance travelled by the
vehicle since its first registration.
Operation
It measures the distance travelled since it was
reset to zero by the driver.
F With the ignition on, press the button until
zeros appear.
Monitoring
26
Warning and indicator lamps
Visual indicators which inform the driver of the occurrence of a malfunction or fault (warning lamp)
or of the operation of a system (operation or deactivation indicator lamp).
When the ignition is switched on
Certain warning lamps come on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched on.
When the engine is started, these warning
lamps should go off.
If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the
information for the warning lamp concerned.
Associated warnings
The illumination, fixed or flashing, of certain
warning lamps may be accompanied by an
audible signal and a message in the screen.
Warning lamps
When the engine is running or the vehicle is
being driven, the illumination of one of the
following warning lamps indicates a malfunction
or fault which requires action on the part of
the driver.
The illumination of a warning lamp is always
accompanied by the display of an additional
message, to assist you in identifying the fault.
If you encounter any problems, contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
1
Monitoring
27
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
STOP fixed, associated with
another warning lamp.
It is associated with the braking
system or the engine coolant
temperature.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Park, switch off the ignition and call a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Service temporarily,
accompanied by
a message.
One or more minor faults for which
there is no specific warning lamp
have been detected.
Identify the cause of the fault using the message
displayed in the screen.
You can deal with some problems yourself, such as a
door open or the start of saturation of the particle filter
(as soon as the traffic conditions allow, regenerate
the filter by driving at a speed of at least 40 mph
(60 km/h), until the warning lamp goes off).
For any other problems, such as a fault with the tyre
under inflation detection system, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed, accompanied by
a message.
One or more major faults for which
there is no specific warning lamp
have been detected.
Identify the cause of the fault using the message
displayed in the screen; you must then contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed, associated with the
flashing and then fixed
display of the service
indicator spanner.
The servicing interval has been
exceeded.
Only on BlueHDi Diesel versions.
Your vehicle must be serviced as soon as possible.
Monitoring
28
Braking fixed, associated with
the STOP warning
lamp.
The braking system fluid level is too
low.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Top up with brake fluid recommended by CITROËN.
If the problem persists, have the system checked by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
+
fixed, associated with
the STOP and ABS
warning lamps.
The electronic brake force distribution
(EBFD) system has a fault.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Anti-lock
Braking System
(ABS)
fixed. The anti-lock braking system has a
fault.
The vehicle retains conventional braking.
Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop without
delay.
Electric parking
brake
flashing. The electric parking brake is not
applied automatically.
The application/release is faulty.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Park on flat level ground, engage a gear (or place the
lever in position P for an automatic gearbox), switch
off the ignition and contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Electric parking
brake fault
fixed. The electric parking brake has a fault. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay.
For more information on the electric parking brake,
refer to the corresponding section.
1
Monitoring
29
Dynamic
stability control
(DSC/ASR)
flashing. The DSC/ASR regulation is
operating.
The system optimises traction and improves the
directional stability of the vehicle in the event of loss of
grip or trajectory.
fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Brake pad wear fixed, accompanied
by an audible signal
and a message in the
display screen.
The brake pads are at an advanced
state of wear.
Have the brake pads replaced by a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
Deactivation of
the automatic
functions of the
electric parking
brake
fixed. The "automatic application" (on
switching off the engine) and
"automatic release" functions are
deactivated or faulty.
Activate the function (depending on the country of
sale) via the vehicle parameters menu or contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop if automatic
application / release is not possible.
For more information on the electric parking brake,
refer to the corresponding section.
Under-inflation fixed. The pressure in one or more wheels
is too low.
Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.
This check should preferably be carried out when the
tyres are cold.
+ flashing then fixed,
accompanied by the
Service warning lamp.
The tyre pressure monitoring system
has a fault or no sensor is detected
on one of the wheels.
Under-inflation detection is not assured.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Monitoring
30
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Maximum
coolant
temperature
fixed. The temperature of the cooling
system is too high.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping
up the level, if necessary.
If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN dealer or
qualified workshop.
Battery charge fixed. The battery charging circuit has a
fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or
cut alternator belt, ...).
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is
started.
If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
+
Seat belt not
fastened /
unfastened
fixed. The driver and/or the front/ rear
passenger has not fastened or has
unfastened their seat belt.
Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.
Seat belts
not fastened /
unfastened
fixed, associated
with the seat belt not
fastened / unfastened
warning lampl.
The illuminated dots represent the not fastened /
unfastened passengers.
They come on:
- fixed for 30 about seconds on starting the vehicle,
- fixed from 0 to 12 mph (0 to 20 km/h) when
driving,
- flashing above 12 mph (20 km/h), accompanied by
an audible signal for about 120 seconds.
1
Monitoring
31
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Engine
autodiagnosis
system
fixed. The emission control system has a
fault.
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.
If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified
workshop without delay.
flashing. The engine management system has
a fault.
Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Low fuel
level
fixed. When it first comes on there remains
approximately 5 litres of fuel in the
tank.
You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running
out of fuel.
This warning lamp wil come on every time the ignition
is switched on, until a sufficient addition of fuel is
made.
Fuel tank capacity: 71 litres.
Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel, this
could damage the emission control and injection
systems.
Monitoring
32
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
AdBlue
®
additive
(BlueHDi Diesel)
fixed, on switching
on the ignition,
accompanied by an
audible signal and a
message indicating the
remaining driving range.
The remaining driving range is
between 350 miles (600 km) and
1500 miles (2400 km).
Have the AdBlue
®
additive tank topped up as soon
as possible: go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop, or carry out this operation yourself by
referring to the corresponding section.
+
flashing associated with
the SERVICE warning
lamp, accompanied by
an audible signal and a
message indicating the
remaining driving range.
The remaining driving range is
between 0 and 350 miles (600 km).
You must top-up the AdBlue
®
additive tank to avoid
a breakdown: go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop, or carry out this operation yourself by
referring to the corresponding section.
flashing, associated
with the SERVICE
warning lamp,
accompanied by an
audible signal and a
message indicating that
starting is prevented.
The AdBlue
®
tank is empty: the
starting inhibition system required
by legislation prevents starting of the
engine.
To be able to start the engine, you must top-up the
AdBlue
®
additive tank: go to a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop, or carry out this operation yourself
by referring to the corresponding section.
It is essential to add at least 3.8 litres of AdBlue
®
to
the additive tank.
1
Monitoring
33
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
+
+
SCR emissions
control system
(BlueHDi Diesel)
fixed, on switching
on the ignition,
associated with the
SERVICE and engine
diagnostic warning
lamps, accompanied
by an audible signal
and a message.
A fault with the SCR emissions
control system has been detected.
This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions
return to normal levels.
flashing, on switching
on the ignition,
associated with the
SERVICE and engine
diagnostic warning
lamps, accompanied by
an audible signal and
a message indicating
the remaining driving
range.
After confirmation of the fault with the
emissions control system, you can
drive for up to 650 miles (1 100 km)
before the engine starting inhibition
system is triggered.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay, to avoid a breakdown.
flashing, on switching
on the ignition,
associated with the
SERVICE and engine
diagnostic warning
lamps, accompanied
by an audible signal
and a message.
You have exceeded the authorised
driving limit following confirmation
of a fault with the emissions control
system: the engine starting inhibition
system prevents starting of the
engine.
To be able to start the engine, you must call on a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Monitoring
34
Front foglamps fixed. The front foglamps are switched on
using the ring on the lighting control
stalk.
Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk rearward
twice to switch off the front foglamps.
Rear foglamps fixed. The rear foglamps are on. Turn the ring on the stalk rearward to switch off the
rear foglamps.
Operation indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Left-hand
direction indicator
flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk is pushed down.
Right-hand
direction indicator
flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk is pushed up.
Sidelamps fixed. The lighting stalk is in the
"Sidelamps" position.
Dipped beam
headlamps
fixed. The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped
beam headlamps" position.
Main beam
headlamps
fixed. The lighting stalk is pulled towards
you.
Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam headlamps.
Hazard warning
lamps
flashing with audible
signal.
The hazard warning lamps switch,
located on the dashboard, has been
operated.
The left-hand and right-hand direction indicators and
their associated indicator lamps flash simultaneously.
If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has come into operation.
It may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen.
1
Monitoring
35
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Diesel engine
pre-heating
fixed. The ignition switch is at the
2nd position (ignition on).
Wait until the warning lamp has switched off before starting.
The duration for which the warning lamp is on is determined
by the climatic conditions.
Parking brake fixed. The parking brake is applied or not
properly released.
Release the parking brake to switch off the warning
lamp, keeping your foot on the brake pedal.
Observe the safety recommendations.
For further information on the parking brake, refer to
the corresponding section.
flashing. The parking brake is not fully applied
or is released.
Passenger's
front airbag
fixed. The control switch, located in the
glove box, is in the "ON" position.
The passenger's front airbag is
activated.
In this case, do not install a rearward
facing child seat.
Turn the control switch to the "OFF" position to
deactivate the front passenger's airbag.
You can install a rearward facing child seat, unless
there is an airbag fault.
Stop & Start fixed. When the vehicle stops (red lights,
traffic jams, ...) the Stop & Start system
has put the engine into STOP mode.
The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts
automatically in START mode, as soon as you want to
move off.
flashes for a few
seconds, then goes
off.
STOP mode is temporarily
unavailable.
or
START mode is invoked
automatically.
For more information on special cases with STOP
mode and START mode, refer to the "Stop & Start"
section.
Monitoring
36
Deactivation indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp is on Cause Action / Observations
Passenger's
front airbag
fixed. The control, located in the glove box,
is set to the OFF position.
The passenger's front airbag is
deactivated.
You can install a rearward facing
child seat, unless there is a fault with
the operation of the airbags.
Set the control to the ON position to activate the
passenger's front airbag.
In this case, do not fit a child seat in the rearward
facing position.
If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.
This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the multifunction screen.
1
Monitoring
37
Monochrome screen C
Displays in the screen Controls
Displays according to context:
- time,
- date,
- ambient temperature with air conditioning
(the value displayed flashes if there is a
risk of ice),
- parking sensor information,
- audio functions,
- alert messages.
A. Access to the "Main Menu"
B. Cancel the operation or return to the
previous display
C. Scroll through the screen menus
Confirmation at the steering wheel
D. Confirmation at the audio system control
panel
Selection of the type of
information displayed (Mode)
Successive presses on the end of the wiper
stalk or on the MODE button on the audio
equipment permit selection of the type of
information presented in the multifunction
screen (date or radio, CD, MP3).
For safety reasons, it is recommended
that the driver does not operate the
controls while the vehicle is in motion.
Monitoring
38
Main Menu "Audio functions"
menu
With the Audio system switched on, once
this menu is selected, you can activate or
deactivate functions associated with using the
radio (RDS, REG, RadioText), CD (introscan,
random play, CD repeat) or MP3 player (USB
port / auxiliary Jack socket).
For more information on the "Audio
functions" application, refer to the Audio
system section.
Press on the button A to view the Main Menu of
the multifunction screen. This menu gives you
access to the following functions:
- audio functions,
- display configuration,
- telephone (Bluetooth hands-free kit).
With this menu selected, you have access to
the following settings:
- brightness-video,
- date and time,
- choice of units.
"Display
configuration" menu
1
Monitoring
39
With the Audio system switched on, once
this menu is selected, you can configure
your Bluetooth hands-free kit (pairing), view
the different telephone directories (calls log,
services...) and manage your calls (start a call,
end a call, double call, secret mode...).
Adjusting the date and time
"Bluetooth - Telephone -
Audio" menu
For safety reasons, configuration of the
multifunction screen by the driver must
only be done when stationary.
For more information, refer to the Audio
system section.
F Press on A.
F Use C to select the "Date and time" menu,
then confirm your choice with a press on C
on the steering wheel or D on the audio
system.
F Select the screen configuration using C.
Confirm with a press on C on the steering
wheel or D on the audio system.
F Select the date and the time settings,
using B. Confirm with a press on C on the
steering wheel or D on the audio system.
F Press C to select the values you wish to
modify. Confirm your choice with a press
on C on the steering wheel or D on the
audio system.
F Confirm with "OK" on the screen.
Monitoring
40
Touch screen tablet
This system gives access to:
- menus for adjusting settings for vehicle
functions and systems,
- audio and display settings menus,
- audio system and telephone controls and
the display of associated information,
- the display of the ambient temperature
(a blue snowflake appears if there is a risk
of ice),
- the display of the trip computer.
And, depending on equipment, it also allows:
- the display of visual parking sensors
information,
- access to the controls for the navigation
system and Internet services, and the
display of associated information.
For reasons of safety, the driver
should only carry out operations
that require close attention, with the
vehicle stationary.
Some functions are not accessible
when driving.
After a few moments with no action on
the secondary page, the primary page
is displayed automatically.
General operation
Recommendations
It is necessary to press firmly, particularly for
"flick" gestures (scrolling through lists, moving
the map...). A light wipe is not enough.
The screen does not recognise pressing with
more than one finger.
This technology allows use at all temperatures
and when wearing gloves.
Principles
Press the MENU button, then the virtual
buttons in the touch screen tablet.
Each menu is displayed over one or two pages
(primary page and secondary page).
Use this button to go to the
secondary page.
Use this button to return to the
primary page.
Use this button for access to
additional information and to the
settings for certain functions.
Use this button to confirm.
Use this button to quit.
Do not use pointed objects on the touch
screen tablet.
Do not touch the touch screen tablet
with wet hands.
Uses a soft clean cloth to clean the
touch screen tablet.
1
Monitoring
41
Menus
Press this button on the control
panel, then the menu button
concerned.
Navigation
Depending on trim level or country of
sale, navigation can be not available,
an option or standard.
See the "Audio and telematics"
section.
Radio Media
See the "Audio and telematics"
section.
Settings
Allows configuration of the display
and the system.
Internet
The connected services are
accessible using the Bluetooth, Wi-Fi
or MirrorLink™ connections.
See the "Audio and telematics"
section.
Telephone
See the "Audio and telematics"
section.
Driving
Gives access to the trip computer.
Depending on version, allows
settings to be adjusted for certain
functions.
See the corresponding section.
1. Volume / mute.
See the "Audio and telematics" section.
Monitoring
42
"Driving" menu
The systems with settings that can be adjusted are detailed in the table below.
Button Corresponding function Comments
Vehicle settings Access to other functions with settings that can be adjusted. The functions are grouped
together under three tabs:
- "Driving assistance"
● "Parking sensors" (Audible and visual parking assistance; see the "Driving" section),
● "Automatic parking brake" (Automatic electric parking brake; see the "Driving" section),
● "Automatic rear wiper in reverse" (Activation of rear wiper coupled to reverse gear; see
the "Visibility" section).
- "Lighting"
● "Guide-me-home lighting" (Automatic guide me home lighting; see the "Visibility"
section),
● "Adaptive lighting" (Directional lighting; see the "Visibility" section).
● "LED daytime running lamps" (see the "Visibility" section).
- " Vehicle access"
● "Driver plip action" (Selective unlocking of the driver's door; see the "Access" section).
● "Driver welcome" (Welcome function; see the "Ease of use and comfort" section).
Select or deselect the tabs at the bottom of the screen to display the functions required.
1
Monitoring
43
"Settings" menu
The functions accessible in this menu are given in the table below.
Button Corresponding function Comments
Audio settings Adjustment of volume, balance...
Turn off screen Turns off the display in the the touch screen tablet (black screen).
Pressing the black screen (or the MENU button) restores the display.
Time/Date Setting the date and time.
Screen settings Adjustment of the display settings (scrolling of text, animations...) and the screen brightness.
Calculator Display the calculator.
Calendar Display the calendar.
Monitoring
44
Setting the date and time
F Select the "Settings" menu.
F In the secondary page, press on "Time/
Date".
F Select "Adjust time" or "Adjust date". F Modify the settings using the number
keypad, then confirm.
F Press "Confirm" to save and quit.
When setting the time, you can select
"Satellite synchronisation", so that
the minutes are adjusted automatically
by satellite reception.
2
Acc ess
45
Remote control key
System which permits central unlocking or locking of the vehicle using the lock or from a distance. It is also used to open the boot, locate and start
the vehicle, as well as providing protection against theft.
Unfolding / Folding the key
Complete unlocking using the
remote control
Unlocking the vehicle
F Press the open padlock to
unlock the vehicle.
Complete unlocking using
the key
F Turn the key in the driver's door lock
towards the front of the vehicle to unlock it.
Selective unlocking using the
remote control
F Press the open padlock once to
unlock the driver's door only.
Each unlocking is confirmed by rapid flashing
of the direction indicators for approximately
two seconds and by switching on of the
courtesy lamp.
According to version, the exterior mirrors unfold
at the same time as the first unlocking action.
F Press the open padlock again to unlock the
other doors and the boot.
Selective unlocking is not possible
using the key.
Unlocking is confirmed by rapid flashing of
the direction indicators for approximately
two seconds and lighting of the courtesy lamp
(if the function is activated).
According to version, the door mirrors unfold at
the same time.
F
First press this button to unfold / fold the key.
The complete or selective unlocking is set via
the vehicle parameters menu (see "Monitoring"
section).
Complete unlocking is activated by default.
Acc ess
46
Normal locking using the key
Locking the vehicle
Normal locking using the remote
control
F Press the closed padlock to
lock the vehicle.
F Press the closed padlock for more than two
seconds to close the windows and sunroof
automatically in addition to locking.
If one of the doors, the rear screen or
the boot is still open, the central locking
does not take place.
When the vehicle is locked, if it is
unlocked inadvertently, it will lock
again automatically after thirty seconds
unless a door is opened.
When stationary with the engine off,
locking is confirmed by flashing of the
interior locking control indicator lamp.
The folding and unfolding of the door
mirrors using the remote control can be
deactivated by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
F Turn the key in the driver's door lock
towards the rear to lock the vehicle.
Locking is confirmed by fixed illumination
of the direction indicators for approximately
two seconds and by the courtesy lamp
going off.
According to version, the door mirrors fold at
the same time.
Boot
F Press this button for more
than one second to unlock and
release the boot.
Manual boot
Motorised boot
F Press this button for more than
one second to unlock and and
trigger the automatic opening
of the boot.
2
Acc ess
47
F Turn the key in the driver's door lock
to the rear of the vehicle to lock it and
hold it in this position for more than two
seconds to close the windows and sunroof
automatically in addition to locking.
F Turn the key to the rear of the vehicle within
five seconds to deadlock it.
Using the key
Deadlocking renders the exterior and
interior door controls inoperative.
It also deactivates the manual central
control button.
Therefore, never leave anyone inside
the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
Deadlocking
F Press the closed padlock
to lock the vehicle or press
the closed padlock for more
than two seconds to close
the windows and sunroof
automatically in addition to
locking.
F Press the closed padlock again within
five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
Using the remote control
Deadlocking is confirmed by fixed lighting
of the direction indicators for approximately
two seconds.
According to version, the exterior mirrors fold at
the same time.
When stationary with the engine off,
locking is confirmed by flashing of the
indicator lamp on the interior locking
control.
If one of the doors or the boot is open
or has not been closed correctly, the
central locking will not work.
Acc ess
48
Operating problem
Following disconnection of the vehicle battery,
replacement of the remote control battery or in
the event of a remote control fault, you can no
longer unlock, lock or locate your vehicle.
F First of all, use the key in the lock to unlock
or lock your vehicle.
F Then, reinitialise the remote control.
If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as
possible.
Reinitialisation
F Switch off the ignition.
F Turn the key to position 2 (Igntion on).
(Refer to the "Starting-switching off the
engine" section).
F Press the closed padlock immediately for a
few seconds, until the operation requested
is triggered.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key
from the ignition switch.
The remote control is fully operational again.
Changing the battery
Battery ref.: CR2032 / 3 volts.
F Unclip the casing using a small screwdriver
at the notch.
F Remove the cover.
F Remove flat battery from its housing.
F Place the new battery into its housing
observing the original direction of fitment.
F Clip the cover into place.
Locating your vehicle
F Press the closed padlock to locate your
locked vehicle in a car park.
This is indicated by switching on of the interior
lighting and flashing of the direction indicators
for a few seconds.
The vehicle remains locked.
If the battery is flat, you are informed
by illumination of this warning lamp,
an audible signal and a message in
the multifunction screen.
2
Acc ess
49
Lost keys
Go to a CITROËN dealer with the vehicle's registration document, your personal
identification documents and if possible the key code label.
The CITROËN dealer will be able to look up the key code and the transponder code
required to order a new key.
Remote control
The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your
pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of
your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have
to be reinitialised.
No remote control can operate when the key is in the ignition switch, even when the ignition
is switched off, except for reinitialisation.
Locking the vehicle
Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the
emergency services more difficult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution, never leave children alone in the vehicle, except for a very short
period.
In all cases, it is essential to remove the key from the ignition switch when leaving the vehicle.
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this could
cause malfunctions.
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle
Have the pairing of all of the keys in your possession checked by a CITROËN dealer, to
ensure that only your keys can be used to open and start the vehicle.
Do not throw the remote control
batteries away, they contain metals
which are harmful to the environment.
Take them to an approved collection
point.
Acc ess
50
Alarm*
- exterior perimeter
The system checks for opening of the vehicle.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a
door, the boot, the bonnet...
- interior volumetric
The system checks for any variation in the
volume in the passenger compartment.
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a
window, enters the passenger compartment or
moves inside the vehicle.
- tilt
The system checks for any change in the
attitude of the vehicle.
The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is lifted,
moved or knocked.
Locking the vehicle with full
alarm system
Activation
* Depending on the country of sale.
Self-protection function
The system checks for the putting out of
service of its components.
The alarm is triggered if the battery, the
central control or the siren wiring are
put out of service or damaged.
For all work on the alarm system,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
System which protects and provides a deterrent
against theft and break-ins. It provides the
following types of monitoring:
F
Switch off the ignition and get out of the
vehicle.
F
Press the locking button on the remote control.
The monitoring system is active: the indicator lamp
in the button flashes once per second.
After the locking button on the remote control
is pressed, the exterior perimeter monitoring is
activated after a delay of 5 seconds and the interior
volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring after a delay of
45 seconds.
If an opening (door, boot...) is not closed fully, the
vehicle is not locked but the exterior perimeter
monitoring will be activated after a delay of
45 seconds at the same time as the interior
volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring.
2
Acc ess
51
Deactivation
F Press the unlocking button on the remote
control.
The alarm system is deactivated: the indicator
lamp in the button goes off.
Locking the vehicle
with exterior perimeter
monitoring only
Deactivate the interior volumetric and anti-tilt
monitoring to avoid unwanted triggering of the
alarm in certain cases such as:
- leaving a pet in the vehicle,
- leaving a window partially open,
- washing your vehicle,
- changing a wheel,
- having your vehicle towed,
- transport by sea.
Deactivation of the interior
volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring
F Switch off the ignition.
F Within ten seconds, press the button until
the indicator lamp is on continuously.
F Get out of the vehicle.
F Press the locking button on the remote
control immediately.
The exterior perimeter monitoring alone is
activated: the indicator lamp in the button
flashes once per second.
Reactivation of the interior
volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring
F Press the unlocking button on the remote
control to deactivate the exterior perimeter
monitoring.
F Press the locking button on the remote
control to activate all the monitoring
functions.
The indicator lamp in the button again flashes
once per second.
To be effective, this deactivation must
be carried out each time the ignition is
switched off.
Acc ess
52
Triggering of the alarm
This is indicated by sounding of the siren and
flashing of the direction indicators for thirty
seconds.
The monitoring functions remain active until
the alarm has been triggered eleven times in
succession.
When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
control, rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
in the button informs you that the alarm was
triggered during your absence. When the
ignition is switched on, this flashing stops
immediately.
Failure of the remote control
F unlock the vehicle using the key in the
driver's door lock,
F open the door; the alarm is triggered,
F switch on the ignition; the alarm stops;
the indicator lamp in the button goes off.
Locking the vehicle without
activating the alarm
F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key
in the driver's door lock.
Operating fault
When the ignition is switched on, fixed
illumination of the indicator lamp in the button
indicates a fault with the system.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Automatic activation*
2 minutes after closing the last door or the
boot, the system is activated automatically.
F To avoid triggering the alarm when entering
the vehicle, first press the remote control
unlocking button.
* Depending on the country of sale.
To deactivate the monitoring functions:
2
Acc ess
53
Electric windows
1. Driver's electric window control.
2. Passenger's electric window control.
3. Rear right electric window control.
4. Rear left electric window control.
5. Deactivation of the rear electric window
and door controls.
One-touch electric
windows
- automatic mode
F Press or pull the control firmly. The
window opens or closes fully when the
control is released.
F Pressing the control again stops the
movement of the window.
Safety anti-pinch
When the window rises and meets an obstacle,
it stops and partially lowers again.
The electric window controls remain
operational for approximately
45 seconds after the ignition is switched
off or until the vehicle is locked after a
door is opened.
If one of the passenger windows cannot
be operated from the driver's door
control panel, carry out the operation
from the control panel of the passenger
door concerned, and vice versa.
If the window cannot be closed (for
example, in the presence of ice),
immediately after the movement is
reversed:
F press and hold the control until the
window opens fully,
F then pull the control immediately
and hold it until the window closes,
F continue to hold the control for
approximately one second after the
window has closed.
The safety anti-pinch function is not
operational during these operations.
There are two options:
- manual mode
F Press or pull the control gently. The
window stops when the control is
released.
Acc ess
54
Reinitialisation
If a window does not rise automatically, its
operation must be reinitialised:
F pull the control until the window stops,
F release the control and pull it again until
the window closes fully,
F continue to hold the control for
approximately one second after the window
has closed,
F press the control to lower the window
automatically to the low position,
F when the window has reached the low
position, press the control again for
approximately one second.
The safety anti-pinch function is not
operational during these operations.
Deactivation of the rear
electric window and door
controls
F For the safety of your children, press
control 5 to deactivate the rear electric
window controls regardless of their
position.
Indicator lamp on, the rear controls are
deactivated.
Indicator lamp off, the rear controls are
activated.
A message in the instrument panel screen
informs you of the activation / deactivation of
the control.
Always remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even for a
short time.
If an obstacle is encountered during
operation of the electric windows, you
must reverse the movement of the
window. To do this, press the control
concerned.
When the driver operates the controls
for the passengers' electric windows,
they must ensure that no one is
preventing correct closing of the
windows.
The driver must ensure that the
passengers use the electric windows
correctly.
Be particularly aware of children when
operating the windows.
This control also deactivates the interior
controls for the rear doors (refer to the "Child
safety - Electric child lock" section).
Any other status of the indicator lamp
indicates a fault with the electric child
lock.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
2
Acc ess
55
Doors
Opening
From inside
Manual central locking
Locking
F Press button A to lock the vehicle.
The red indicator lamp on the button comes
on. It flashes when the doors are locked while
stationary with the engine off.
From outside
When the selective unlocking is
activated, the first press of the remote
control unlocking button permits
unlocking of the driver's door only.
With the selective unlocking activated:
- the driver's door control unlocks the
driver's door only,
- the other door controls unlock the
other doors and the boot.
The interior door controls do not
operate when the vehicle is deadlocked.
If one of the doors is open, the central
locking from the inside does not take
place.
System which provides full manual locking or
unlocking of the doors and boot from the inside.
F After unlocking the vehicle completely
using the remote control or the key, pull the
door handle.
F Pull the interior control lever of a front door;
this unlocks the vehicle completely.
Acc ess
56
Unlocking
F Press button A again to unlock the vehicle.
The red indicator lamp on the button
switches off.
Automatic central locking
Locking
When the speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the
doors and the boot lock automatically.
If one of the doors is open, the automatic
central locking does not take place.
If the boot is open, the automatic central
locking of the doors is active.
Unlocking
F Above 6 mph (10 km/h), press button A to
unlock the doors and the boot temporarily.
Activation
F Press button A for more than two seconds.
A confirmation message appears on the
instrument panel screen, accompanied by an
audible signal.
Deactivation
F Press button A again for more than
two seconds.
A confirmation message appears on the
instrument panel screen, accompanied by an
audible signal.
If the vehicle is locked or deadlocked
from the outside, the red indicator lamp
flashes and button A is inactive.
F In this case, use the remote control
or the key to unlock the vehicle.
System which provides full automatic locking
or unlocking of the doors and the boot while
driving.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
2
Acc ess
57
System allowing the doors to be locked and
unlocked manually in the event of a malfunction
of the central locking system or battery failure.
Locking the driver's door
F Insert the key in the door lock, then turn it
to the rear.
You can also apply the procedure described for
the passenger doors.
Unlocking the driver's door
F Insert the key in the door lock, then turn it
to the front.
Locking the front and rear
passenger doors
F Open the doors.
F On the rear doors, check that the child lock
is not on (see the corresponding section).
F Remove the black cap, located on the edge
of the door, using the key.
F Insert the key in the socket without forcing
it, then without turning it, move the latch
sideways towards the inside of the door.
F Remove the key and refit the cap.
F Close the doors and check that the vehicle
has locked correctly from the outside.
Unlocking the front and rear
passenger doors
F Pull the interior door opening control.
Back-up control
Acc ess
58
Boot (Saloon)
F Press upwards on lever 1 and lift up the
boot lid.
With the vehicle stationary, this is carried out
using:
- The remote control.
- The key in a door lock.
- The interior central locking/ unlocking control.
The boot automatically locks when the vehicle
is moving at a speed of over 6 mph (10 km/h),
even if automatic central locking is deactivated.
It is unlocked when a door is opened or when
the central locking button is pressed (speed
lower than 6 mph (10 km/h)).
Opening Locking/unlocking Emergency boot release
Unlocking
F Fold back the rear seats to gain access to
the lock from inside the boot.
F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the
lock to unlock the tailgate.
F Push the white part, located inside the
lock, to the left to unlock the boot.
System for mechanical unlocking of the boot
in the event of a battery or central locking
malfunction.
2
Acc ess
59
Motorised opening
Boot (Tourer)
Manual opening
F Press upwards on lever A and lift up the
tailgate.
F Press upwards on lever A, or press of more
than one second on button B of the remote
control.
Manual closing
F Lower the tailgate using the interior
handle C.
Motorised closing
F Press the push-button D to close the
tailgate.
Do not interrupt the closing of the tailgate;
if any obstacle prevents it closing, the
operation will stop and the tailgate will
automatically rise by a few centimetres.
Do not attempt to help the opening of
the tailgate manually after pressing the
control A.
Acc ess
60
Cancelling the
memorisation
With the tailgate in the intermediate position,
you can cancel the stored position:
F Make a long press on push-button D.
The system emits a long audible beep.
F Release the push-button D. The tailgate
will return to the fully open position at the
next use.
Electrical protection of the
motor
If the tailgate is repeatedly opened and closed
in quick succession, the motor can start to
overheat and then cut out, preventing opening
and closing of the tailgate.
Allow the motor to cool down for ten minutes
without opening or closing the tailgate.
Closing in manual back-up mode remains
possible.
To avoid risk of injury, make sure that
no one is in the vicinity of the boot while
opening and closing.
If the tailgate is carrying extra weight
(snow, bicycle carrier, etc.) there is a
risk of it closing under this load. Support
the tailgate or first unload the bicycle
carrier or clear the snow.
When using an automatic car wash,
don’t forget to lock the vehicle so as to
avoid any risk of motorised opening of
the tailgate.
Memorisation of an
intermediate position
You can store an opening angle for the tailgate:
F Manually or automatically move the tailgate
to the required position.
F Make a long press on push-button D.
The system emits a short audible beep.
F Release the push-button D.
Interrupting the opening /
closing of the tailgate
When the tailgate is being opened or closed
electrically, you can interrupt its movement
at any point by pressing push-button D, the
control A or button B.
You can then open or close the tailgate
electrically or manually, if necessary moving it
in the opposite direction to release it.
Locking/unlocking
With the vehicle stationary, this is carried out
using:
- The remote control.
- The key in a door lock.
- The interior central locking/ unlocking
control.
The boot automatically locks when the vehicle
is moving at a speed of over 6 mph (10 km/h),
even if automatic central locking is deactivated.
It is unlocked when a door is opened or when
the central locking button is pressed (at a
speed of less than 6 mph (10 km/h)).
2
Acc ess
61
Sunroof (Saloon)
Sunroof closed
- Press B to first notch: tilting.
- Press B to second notch: automatic
complete tilting.
- Press A to first notch: sliding towards rear.
- Press A to second notch: automatic total
sliding towards rear.
Sunroof open
- Press B to first notch: closure.
- Press B to second notch: automatic total
closure.
Operation
Tilted sunroof
- Press A to first notch: closure.
- Press A to second notch: automatic total
closure.
Your sun roof is fitted with a manually-operated
blind.
Anti-pinch
An anti-pinch device stops the sun roof from
closing, whether sliding or tilting. If it meets an
obstacle, it re-opens.
Reinitialisation
After a battery disconnection or if there has
been a malfunction, you have to reinitialise the
anti-pinch function.
F move control B until the roof is in the
complete tilting position,
F keep control B pressed down for a
minimum of 1 second.
During these operations, the anti-pinch
function does not operate.
.
Always remove the ignition key when
leaving the vehicle, even if for a short
time.
In the event of anything being caught by
the sunroof closing, you must reverse
the roof movement.
Do this by reversing the position of the
control switch.
When the driver is operating the
sunroof, they must always make sure
that the passengers are not preventing
it from closing properly.
The driver must ensure that passengers
use the sunroof control correctly.
Be particularly aware of children when
operating the sun roof.
The sunroof and its installation are not
available in the accessory range.
Acc ess
62
Panoramic sunroof (Tourer)
This comprises a tinted glass panoramic
area 1 to improve brightness and vision in the
passenger compartment.
It is fitted with an electric blind 2 to help
maintain a comfortable temperature and
reduce noise.
Opening
F Press control A.
Pressing to the 1st notch allows you to open
the blind step by step.
Pressing to the 2nd notch allows you to fully
open the blind.
The blind stops in the closest pre-defined
position (11 positions) as soon as you release
the control.
Closing
F Press control B.
Press to the first notch to close the blind step
by step.
Press to the second notch to close the blind
completely.
The blind stops at the nearest pre-set position
(11 positions) as soon as you release the
control.
Sequential electric blind
2
Acc ess
63
Anti-pinch
If the blind meets an obstacle whilst closing, it
stops and opens partially again.
You must re-initialise the anti-pinch function
within 5 seconds of the blind stopping:
F press control B until the blind is fully closed
(closing in steps of a few centimetres).
After a battery disconnection, or if there has
been a malfunction, you have to re-initialise the
anti-pinch function:
F press control B to the 2nd notch
(fully closed),
F wait until the blind is fully closed,
F press control B for at least 3 seconds.
If the blind opens randomly during a closing
operation, and straight after the blind stops:
F Press control B until the blind closes fully.
During these operations, the anti-pinch
function does not operate.
In the event of anything being caught
when the blind is moving, you must
reverse the movement of the blind.
To do so, reverse the position of the
control.
When the driver is operating the blind,
he or she must always make sure that
the passengers are not preventing it
from closing properly.
The driver must ensure that passengers
use the blind correctly.
Pay particular attention to children
when operating the blind.
Ease of use and comfort
64
Front seats
Manual adjustments
1. Adjustments to the height and angle of
the head restraint
To raise it, pull upwards.
To lower it, press on the release button A
and simultaneously on the head restraint
itself. The adjustment is correct when the
top edge of the head restraint is at the
same height as the top of the head. It is
also tilt adjustable.
To remove it, press the release button A,
then pull it upwards. It may be necessary to
adjust the backrest angle.
2. Adjustment of the backrest angle
Operate the control and adjust the position
of the backrest to the front or to the rear.
3. Adjustment of the seat height
Raise or lower the control the number
of times required to obtain the desired
position.
4. Longitudinal adjustment of seat
Lift the control bar and adjust to the desired
position.
5. Adjustment of lumbar support
Turn the control and adjust to the desired
position.
6. Heated seat controls
The heated seats only operate when the
engine is running.
Seat consisting of a seat cushion, seat back and head restraint which can all be adjusted for optimum driving comfort.
For your safety, do not drive with the
head restraints removed; they must be
in place and correctly adjusted.
Before moving the seat backwards,
ensure that there is nothing that might
prevent the full travel of the seat, so
as to avoid the risk of of jamming the
seat caused by the presence of objects
on the floor behind the seat or rear
passengers. If the seat jams, stop the
movement immediately.
3
Ease of use and comfort
65
Electric adjustments
To adjust the electric seats, switch on the
ignition or start the engine if the vehicle has
gone into economy mode.
Seat adjustments are also possible for a short
period after opening one of the front doors or
switching off the ignition.
1. Adjustment of the seat height and
angle, and longitudinal position
Raise or lower the front of the control to
adjust the seat cushion angle.
Raise or lower the rear of the control to
raise or lower the seat.
Slide the control forwards or backwards to
move the seat forward or back.
2. Adjustment of the backrest angle
Move the control forwards or backwards to
adjust the backrest angle.
3. Adjustment of the angle of the top of
the backrest
Move the control forwards or backwards to
adjust the angle of the top of the backrest.
Before moving the seat backwards,
ensure that there is nothing that might
prevent the full travel of the seat, so
as to avoid the risk of of jamming the
seat caused by the presence of objects
on the floor behind the seat or rear
passengers. If the seat jams, stop the
movement immediately.
Move the control:
- Forwards or backwards to increase or
reduce the lumbar support.
- Upwards or downwards to raise or lower
the lumbar support zone.
4. Adjustment of lumbar support
This function allows you to independently
adjust the height and level of lumbar
support.
Ease of use and comfort
66
Head restraint height and angle
adjustments
(electric seats)
F To adjust the angle of the head restraint,
push back or pull forward section B of the
head restraint until you reach the desired
position.
F To raise it, pull upwards.
F To lower it, press on the control C to
release it, and simultaneously on the head
restraint itself.
F To remove it, press on the control C to
release it, then pull it upwards.
Heated seats control
With the engine running, the front seats can
operate separately.
F Use the corresponding adjustment dial,
placed on the outer side of each front seat,
to switch on and select the level of heating
required:
0: Off.
1: Low.
2: Medium.
3: High.
This function provides the driver with a back
massage. It only operates when the engine is
running.
F Press on button A.
The warning lamp comes on and the massage
function is activated for a period of 1 hour.
During this time, massage is performed in
cycles of 6 minutes (4 minutes of massage
followed by 2 minutes break). In total, the
system will perform 10 cycles.
After 1 hour, the function is deactivated.
The warning lamp goes out.
Massage function
Deactivation
You can deactivate the massage function at
any time by pressing on button A.
3
Ease of use and comfort
67
Storing driving positions
System which stores the settings of the driver's
seat. It allows two positions to be stored.
Use the buttons located on the door, driver's
side.
When storing a driving position, the air
conditioning settings are also memorised.
Storing a position
Using buttons M / 1 / 2
F Switch on the ignition.
F Adjust your seat.
F Press button M, then press button 1 or 2
within four seconds.
An audible signal confirms that the settings
have been stored.
Storing a new position cancels the previous
position.
Welcome function
The welcome function assists entry and exit
from the vehicle.
After switching off the ignition and opening
the driver’s door, the driver's seat moves back
automatically and then stays in this position,
ready for the next entry to the vehicle.
When switching on the ignition, the seat moves
forward to the memorised driving position.
When moving the seat, take care that no
person or object hinders the automatic
movement of the seat.
This function is deactivated by default.
You can activate or deactivate this function in
the vehicle parameters menu.
To adjust the air conditioning, refer to
the "Air conditioning" section.
For your safety, avoid storing a driving
position while driving.
Recalling a stored position
Ignition on or engine running
F Briefly press button 1 or 2 to recall the
corresponding position.
An audible signal indicates the end of the
adjustment.
When the ignition is on, after a few consecutive
position recalls, the function will be deactivated
until the engine is started, to prevent
discharging of the battery.
Ease of use and comfort
68
Steering wheel adjustment
F First, adjust the driver's seat to the most
suitable position.
F When stationary, lower the lever A to
release the steering wheel adjustment.
F Adjust for height and reach.
F Raise the lever to lock the steering wheel
adjustment.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and reach to adapt the driving position to the size of
the driver.
Adjustment
As a safety precaution, these
operations must only be carried out
while the vehicle is stationary.
After locking, if you press firmly on the
steering wheel, a slight click may be
heard.
3
Ease of use and comfort
69
Mirrors
Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glasses
providing the lateral rearward vision necessary
for overtaking or parking. They can also be
folded.
Adjustment
With the ignition on:
F move control A to the right or to the left to
select the corresponding mirror,
F move control B in all four directions to
adjust,
F return control A to the central position.
Folding
F From outside; lock the vehicle using the
remote control or the key.
F From inside; with the ignition on, pull
control A rearwards.
If the mirrors are folded using control A, they
will not unfold when the vehicle is unlocked.
Control A must be pulled again.
Unfolding
F From outside; unlock the vehicle using the
remote control or the key.
F From inside; with the ignition on, pull
control A rearwards.
If the position is changed manually, a long
press on control A re-engages the mirror.
Door mirrors
The objects observed are, in reality,
closer than they appear.
Take this into account in order to
correctly judge the distance of vehicles
approaching from behind.
As a safety measure, the mirrors must
be adjusted to reduce the blind spot.
Demisting / defrosting of the door
mirrors is associated with that of
the rear screen.
The folding and unfolding of the door
mirrors using the remote control can be
deactivated by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Demisting - Defrosting
See the "Demisting - Defrosting the rear
screen" section.
Ease of use and comfort
70
Automatic day/night model
In order to guarantee optimum visibility
during your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens
automatically when reverse gear is engaged.
By means of a sensor, which measures the
light from the rear of the vehicle, this system
automatically and progressively changes
between the day and night uses.
It has an anti-dazzle system which darkens the
mirror glass: this reduces any driver discomfort
caused by the light beam of following vehicles,
the sun...
In vehicles fitted with electrochromatic door
mirrors, the system has an on/off button and an
associated warning lamp.
On
F With the ignition on, press on button 1.
The warning lamp 2 comes on and the mirror
glass is in automatic mode.
Off
F Press on button 1.
The warning lamp 2 goes off and the mirror
glass remains in its lightest definition.
Rear view mirror
Manual day/night model
Adjustment
F Adjust the mirror so that the glass is
directed correctly in the "day" position.
Day / night position
F Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti-
dazzle position.
F Push the lever to change to the normal
"day" position.
Adjustable mirror providing a central rearward view.
Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which darkens the mirror glass and reduces the nuisance to
the driver caused by the sun, headlamps from other vehicles...
3
Ease of use and comfort
71
Rear head restraints
The rear head restraints can be removed and
have two positions:
- high, position for use,
- low, storage position.
To raise a head restraint, pull it upwards.
To lower it, press the lug then the head
restraint.
To remove it, place it in the high position, push
the lug and pull it upwards.
To refit it, engage the head restraint rods in the
holes taking care to remain in line with the seat
back.
Rear seats
Bench seat, the left-hand (2/3) or right-hand (1/3) section of which can be folded to adapt the boot load space.
In order to fold a rear seat without any risk of
damage, always start with the seat cushion,
never with the seat backrest:
F Move the corresponding front seat forward
if necessary.
F Raise the front of the seat cushion 1.
F Tilt the seat cushion 1 fully against the front
seat.
F Check that the seat belt is positioned
correctly on the side of the seat backrest.
F Lower or remove the head restraints if
necessary.
Folding the seat
F Pull the control 2 forward to release the
seat backrest 3.
F Fold the seat backrest 3 fully down.
Never drive with the head restraints
removed, they must be in place and
correctly adjusted.
The seat cushion 1 can be removed to
increase the load volume.
Ease of use and comfort
72
Removing the seat cushion
Returning the seat backrest to
its original position
F
Put the seat backrest 3 into the fully upright
position and secure it.
F
Return the seat cushion 1 to its original position.
F
Refit the head restraints or put them back in place.
When returning the rear seat to its
original position, take care not to trap
the seat belts and ensure that their
buckles are positioned correctly.
F Move the corresponding front seat forward
if necessary.
F Raise the front of the seat cushion 1.
F Tilt the seat cushion 1 fully against the front
seat.
Refitting the seat cushion
F Position the seat cushion 1 vertically.
F Insert one of the fixing brackets 2 into one
of the seat cushion supports. Carry out the
same operation for the other side keeping it
firmly towards the middle.
F Fully fold down the seat cushion 1.
F Press on the seat cushion to secure it.
The red indicator on the control 2 should
no longer be visible; if it is, push the seat
backrest 3 fully back.
F
Extract the fixing brackets 2 from the seat
cushion support by keeping it firmly towards the
middle. Carry out the same operation for the
other side.
F
Remove the seat cushion 1 by pulling upwards.
3
Ease of use and comfort
73
Ventilation
A. Sunshine sensor.
B. Soft air diffusion grille.
The soft air diffusion grille located in the
centre of the dashboard provides optimum
distribution of the air for the front seats.
This system eliminates unpleasant air
currents while maintaining an optimum
temperature in the passenger compartment.
To open the soft air diffusion grille, turn the
wheel upwards.
To close the soft air diffusion grille, turn the
wheel fully downwards.
In very hot weather, to obtain more
satisfactory central and side ventilation, it
is advisable to close the diffused air grille.
C. Cooled glove box.
D. Rear passenger vents.
Ease of use and comfort
74
We recommend use of the automatic regulation
of the air conditioning.
It permits automatic and optimised control
of all of the following functions: air flow,
temperature in the passenger compartment
and air distribution, by means of various
sensors (ambient temperature, sunshine).
This eliminates any need for you to change
your settings other than the temperature value
displayed.
F
Take care not to cover the sunshine
sensor A.
If you select the automatic mode
(by pressing the "AUTO" control) and leave
all of the vents open, optimum comfort will be
maintained and humidity and condensation will
be removed regardless of the exterior climatic
conditions.
The temperature in the passenger compartment
can only be lower than the ambient temperature
if the air conditioning is on.
In order to be effective, the air conditioning must
be used with the windows closed. If the vehicle
has been parked in the sun for a long period
and the interior temperature is very high, first
ventilate the passenger compartment with the
windows open for a few minutes, then close the
windows.
Heating, ventilation and air conditioning recommendations
To keep the air conditioning system in
good working order it is essential that it is
operated at least once a month.
The air conditioning uses engine power
during its operation. As a result, the fuel
consumption of the vehicle increases.
In certain cases of particularly arduous use
(e.g. towing the maximum load on a steep
gradient in high temperatures), switching off
the air conditioning saves engine power and
improves the towing capacity.
Air inlet
Check that the exterior grille for the air inlet,
at the bottom of the windscreen, is clean and
free of dead leaves, snow, etc.
When washing the vehicle using a high
pressure nozzle, avoid spraying at the air
inlet.
Maximum comfort is obtained by means of
a good distribution of air in the passenger
compartment, both in the front and in the rear.
To obtain a uniform distribution of air, take
care not to block the exterior air intake grille
located at the base of the windscreen, the
vents, the air outlets under the front seats and
the air extractor located behind the flaps in
the boot.
The front and rear vents are fitted with
thumbwheels to adjust the air flow and
direction. We recommend that you leave all of
the vents open.
Dust filter / Odour filter
(active carbon)
There is a filter for excluding odours and
dust.
This filter must be changed in line with the
vehicle's servicing schedule. (Refer to the
maintenance and warranty guide).
Air conditioning Air circulation
3
Ease of use and comfort
75
Digital air conditioning (mono-zone)
This is the normal system
operating mode. In accordance
with the level of comfort chosen,
pressing this control, confirmed
illumination of indicator lamp A,
permits automatic and simultaneous control of all
of the following functions:
- Air flow.
- Temperature in the passenger
compartment.
- Air distribution.
- Air intake.
- Air conditioning.
1. Automatic operation
It is advisable to leave all of the vents open.
Simply pressing one of the controls, with the
exception of control 2, switches the system to
manual mode.
Indicator lamp A goes off.
2. Temperature adjustment
Turn control 2 to change the
temperature:
- To the right to increase
the temperature.
1. Automatic operation
2. Temperature adjustment
3. Air distribution adjustment
4. Air conditioning On / Off
5. Air flow adjustment
6. Front demisting / defrosting
7. Rear demisting / defrosting
8. Intake of exterior air / Recirculation of
interior air
9. Display screen
- To the left to reduce the temperature.
The setting required is displayed.
The value indicated in the screen corresponds
to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in
degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on
the screen configuration.
A setting around the value 21 usually provides
optimum comfort. However, depending on your
requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is
normal.
The air conditioning system operates with the engine running.
Mono-zone: this is the overall regulation of the temperature, distribution and flow of air in the passenger
compartment.
The symbols and messages associated with the digital air conditioning controls appear in the display screen.
On entering the vehicle, the interior
temperature may be much colder (or
warmer) than is comfortable. There
is no need to change the temperature
displayed to obtain rapidly the level of
comfort required.
The automatic regulation of the air
conditioning will use its maximum
performance settings to correct the
temperature difference as quickly as
possible.
Ease of use and comfort
76
Control via the manual controls
It is possible to adjust one or more functions
manually, while leaving the other functions in
automatic mode.
F Press one of the controls, with the
exception of the one that regulates the
temperature 2. Indicator lamp A goes off.
Switching to manual mode may result in
discomfort (temperature, humidity, odour,
condensation) and may not provide optimum
comfort.
To return to automatic mode, press the "AUTO"
control.
3. Air distribution adjustment
F Press the controls 3 to
change the distribution of the
air flow.
4. Air conditioning
F Press control 4. Indicator
lamp B comes on.
In order to be effective, the air conditioning
must be used with the windows closed.
Deactivating the air conditioning may result
in discomfort (temperature, humidity, odour,
condensation).
The indicator lamps corresponding to the
distribution chosen come on:
- Windscreen and front side windows.
- Front ventilation (central and side vents
and air diffusion grille if open) and rear
ventilation.
- Front and rear footwells.
The air conditioning will only operate when the
engine is running. The air blower control (air
flow adjustment) must be active to obtain air
conditioning.
Simultaneous display of the distribution of
air to the windscreen and side windows and
of front and rear ventilation is not possible.
3
Ease of use and comfort
77
With Stop & Start, when demisting has
been activated, the STOP mode is not
available.
Switching off the ventilation
F Turn control 5 to the left until
the flow of air stops.
5. Air ow adjustment
F Turn control 5 to the right to
increase the air flow or to the
left to reduce it.
6. Front demisting / defrosting
In certain cases, the "AUTO"
mode may not be sufficient to
demist or defrost the windows
(humidity, several passengers,
ice).
The "OFF" symbol is displayed in the display
screen.
This action switches off the screen and the indicator
lamps.
It deactivates all of the system's functions, with the
exception of the rear screen demisting.
The temperature-related comfort is no longer controlled
(temperature, humidity, odour, condensation).
Avoid driving for too long with the air conditioning off.
The air flow level is indicated by the
progressive illumination of the bars in the
control panel screen 9.
To prevent condensation and deterioration
of the quality of the air in the passenger
compartment, ensure that an adequate flow of
air is maintained.
To reactivate the air conditioning:
F Press control 1.
F Press control 6 to clear the windows
quickly. The indicator lamp comes on.
The "Demisting" mode controls the
temperature, air flow and intake and distributes
the ventilation to the windscreen and front side
windows.
Resuming manual control exits from
"Demisting" mode. It must be cancelled to
permit renewal of the air in the passenger
compartment and demisting.
Once the screen is clear, pressing control 1
returns the system to "AUTO" mode.
Ease of use and comfort
78
F Press control 7, with the
engine running, to demist
the rear screen and the door
mirrors. The indicator lamp
comes on.
7. Rear demisting / defrosting
This function enables you to isolate the
passenger compartment from exterior fumes
and odours.
Switch off the rear screen and door
mirrors demisting when you consider
this necessary as low current
consumption reduces fuel consumption.
F Press control 8 to set the air
intake mode, the indicator
lamp comes on.
Demisting is switched off automatically to
prevent an excessive consumption of current
and in relation to the ambient temperature.
It may be stopped by pressing control 7 again
or when the engine is switched off.
However, demisting resumes when the engine
is switched on again.
It must be cancelled as soon as possible to
permit renewal of the air in the passenger
compartment and demisting.
The heated rear screen operates independently
of the air conditioning system.
You can store the settings of the digital
air conditioning system. Refer to the
"Storing driving positions" section.
When starting with the engine cold,
the flow will reach its optimum level
gradually to prevent an excessive
distribution of cold air.
When entering the vehicle after it has
been parked for a fairly long period, if
the interior temperature is very different
from your comfort setting there is
no need to change the temperature
displayed in order to quickly reach the
level of comfort required. The system
automatically uses its maximum
performance to correct the difference in
temperature as quickly as possible.
The water resulting from the air
conditioning condensation is
discharged via an opening provided
for this purpose; therefore, a puddle of
water may form underneath the vehicle
when stationary.
In all seasons, if the weather is cool,
the air conditioning is useful as it
removes the humidity from the air
and the condensation. Avoid driving
for prolonged periods with the air
conditioning switched off.
8. Intake of exterior air /
Recirculation of interior air
3
Ease of use and comfort
79
Digital air conditioning (dual-zone)
The air conditioning system operates with the engine running.
Dual-zone: this is the independent regulation of the temperature and air distribution on the driver's
side and the front passenger's side.
The driver and front passenger can each adjust the temperature and the distribution of the air to
suit their requirements.
The symbols and messages associated with the digital air conditioning controls appear in the
display screen.
This is the normal system
operating mode. In accordance
with the level of comfort chosen,
pressing this control, confirmed
by illumination of indicator
lamp A, permits automatic and
simultaneous control of all of the
following functions:
1a-1b. Automatic operation
1a. Automatic operation on the driver's side
1b. Automatic operation on the passenger's
side
2a. Temperature adjustment on the driver's side
2b. Temperature adjustment on the
passenger's side
3a. Air distribution adjustment on the driver's
side
3b. Air distribution adjustment on the
passenger's side
4a. Driver's zone screen
4b. Passenger's zone screen
5. Air flow adjustment
6. Air conditioning On / Off
7. Intake of exterior air / Recirculation of interior
air
8. Rear demisting / defrosting
9. Front demisting / defrosting
- Air flow.
- Temperature in the passenger
compartment.
- Air distribution.
- Air conditioning.
- Automatic air recirculation.
It is advisable to leave all of the vents open.
Simply pressing one of the controls, with the
exception of temperature regulation 2a and 2b,
switches the system to manual mode. Indicator
lamp A goes off.
Ease of use and comfort
80
2a-2b. Temperature adjustment
Control via the manual
controls
3a-3b. Air distribution
adjustment
F Press control 3b to change the distribution
of the air flow on the passenger's side.
The indicator lamps corresponding to the
distribution chosen come on:
- Windscreen and front side windows.
- Front ventilation (central and side vents
and air diffusion grille if open) and rear
ventilation.
- Front and rear footwells.
F Turn control 2a to change the temperature
on the driver's side and control 2b
to change the temperature on the
passenger's side: to the right to increase or
to the left to reduce it.
The setting required is displayed.
The value indicated on the display corresponds
to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in
degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on
the screen configuration.
A setting around the value 21 usually provides
optimum comfort. However, depending on your
requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is
normal.
F Press control 3a
to change the
distribution of the
air flow on the
driver's side.
F Press one of the controls, with the
exception of temperature regulation 2a and
2b. The indicator lamps A in the "AUTO"
controls go off.
It is possible to adjust one or more functions
manually while leaving the other functions in
automatic mode.
Switching to manual mode may result in discomfort
(temperature, humidity, odour, condensation) and
may not provide optimum comfort.
To return to "AUTO" mode, press controls 1a
and 1b. The indicator lamps A come on.
On entering the vehicle, the interior
temperature may be much colder (or
warmer) than is comfortable. There
is no need to change the temperature
displayed in order to quickly obtain the
level of comfort required.
The automatic regulation of the air
conditioning will use its maximum
performance settings to correct the
temperature difference as quickly as
possible.
Simultaneous display of the
distribution of air to the windscreen
and side windows and of front and rear
ventilation is not possible.
3
Ease of use and comfort
81
5. Air ow adjustment
Reducing the air flow to minimum switches
the air conditioning system OFF.
To prevent condensation and deterioration
of the quality of the air in the passenger
compartment, ensure that an adequate flow of
air is maintained.
6. Air conditioning
The air conditioning will only
operate when the engine is running.
The air blower control (air flow
adjustment) must be active in order
to obtain air conditioning.
7. Intake of exterior air /
Recirculation of interior air
Automatic air intake mode
It is activated by default in
automatic comfort regulation.
Automatic mode is activated with
reverse gear or operation of the
screenwash.
Closing the air intake
F Press control 7 to close the
exterior air intake.
It must be cancelled as soon as possible to
permit renewal of the air in the passenger
compartment and demisting.
Intake of exterior air
F Press control 7 once to open
the exterior air intake.
While retaining the other settings, this position
allows the driver to isolate the passenger
compartment at any time from unpleasant
exterior odours and fumes.
F Press the control:
- to increase the air flow,
- to reduce the air flow.
The air flow level is indicated by the
progressive illumination of the fan
blade indicator lamps.
This function permits recirculation of the air
and isolation the passenger compartment from
exterior fumes and odours. It is inactive when
the ambient temperature is below +5 °C to
avoid the risk of misting inside the vehicle.
You can store the settings of the air
conditioning system. Refer to the
"Storing driving positions" section.
F Press control 6. The indicator lamp comes
on.
In order to be effective, the air conditioning
must be used with the windows closed.
Ease of use and comfort
82
9. Front demisting / defrosting
In certain cases, the "AUTO"
mode may not be sufficient to
demist or defrost the windows
(humidity, several passengers,
ice).
8. Rear demisting / defrosting
The heated rear screen operates
independently of the air
conditioning system.
F Press control 8, with the engine running, to
demist the rear screen and the mirrors. The
indicator lamp comes on.
Demisting is switched off automatically to
avoid excessive consumption of current and
depending on the exterior temperature.
It may be stopped by pressing control 8 again
or when the engine is switched off.
In this latter case, the demisting resumes if the
engine is switched on again within one minute.
F Press control 9 to clear the windows
quickly. The indicator lamp comes on.
This system controls the temperature, air flow
and intake and distributes the ventilation to the
windscreen and front side windows.
Resuming manual control exits from the
"Demisting" mode. It must be cancelled as
soon as possible to permit renewal of the air in
the passenger compartment and demisting.
Pressing one of the controls 1a or 1b returns
the system to the "AUTO" mode.
With Stop & Start, when demisting has
been activated, the STOP mode is not
available.
When starting with the engine cold,
air flow will reach its optimum level
gradually to prevent an excessive
distribution of cold air.
When entering the vehicle after it has
been parked for a fairly long period, if
the interior temperature is very different
from your comfort setting there is
no need to change the temperature
displayed in order to quickly reach the
level of comfort required. The system
automatically uses its maximum
performance to correct the difference in
temperature as quickly as possible.
The water resulting from the air
conditioning condensation is
discharged via an opening provided
for this purpose; therefore, a puddle of
water may form underneath the vehicle
when stationary.
In all seasons, if the weather is cool,
the air conditioning is useful as it
removes the humidity from the air
and the condensation. Avoid driving
for prolonged periods with the air
conditioning switched off.
Switch off the rear screen and
exterior mirrors demisting when you
consider this necessary as low current
consumption reduces fuel consumption.
3
Ease of use and comfort
83
Map reading lamps
F With the ignition on, press the
corresponding switch.
Panoramic sunroof rear
reading lamps (Tourer)
With the key in position or with the ignition on:
F Press the corresponding switch 1.
The reading lamp concerned comes on for
ten minutes.
The rear reading lamps come on:
- when the key is removed from the ignition,
- when the vehicle is unlocked.
They switch off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on.
Courtesy lamps
1. Front courtesy lamp
2. Map reading lamps
Front courtesy lamp
Rear courtesy lamp
1. Rear courtesy lamp
2. Map reading lamps
In this position, the courtesy lamp
comes on gradually:
Lighting off.
Lighting on.
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when a door is opened,
- when the key is removed from the ignition,
- when the remote control locking button is
activated, in order to locate your vehicle.
It switches off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
In lighting on mode, different lighting
times are available:
- with the ignition off, approximately
ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode,
approximately thirty seconds,
- with the engine running, unlimited.
Ease of use and comfort
84
Interior mood lighting
Your vehicle is equipped with interior mood lighting for the centre console and the door handles.
Central console Lighting for door opening
controls
Operation
These lamps are activated with the automatic
illumination of headlamps, when the ambient
light is poor. They are deactivated when the
instrument panel is off.
The intensity of the lighting varies along with
that of the instrument panel.
F Press buttons A to increase or reduce the
intensity of the lighting.
This is located on the front and rear interior
door opening controls.
The rear door opening controls lighting is
deactivated if the child lock is on.
The lamps are located on the roof console,
near the front interior lamp. They illuminate the
central console.
3
Ease of use and comfort
85
Pavement lighting
With the door open, this illuminates the ground
next to the vehicle.
Floor lighting
In the front of the vehicle, when a door
is opened, this illuminates the interior of
the vehicle.
The welcome lighting is made up of:
- The interior (roof) lamps.
- The floor lighting.
- The pavement lighting when a door is open.
Welcome lighting
Ease of use and comfort
86
Sun visor
F With the ignition on, lift the flap; the mirror
is illuminated automatically.
To prevent dazzle from ahead, fold the visor
downwards.
It can be disengaged from its central fixing and
pivoted over to the side windows if required.
Cooled glove box
F To open the glove box, pull the handle and
lower the lid.
It has automatic illumination.
The glove box has an air vent A that can be
opened and closed manually.
It gives access to the deactivation switch B for
the passengers's front airbag.
The glove box should be kept closed
while driving.
Front ttings
F Pull the grip towards you to open it.
Driver's storage compartment
It gives access to the dashboard
fusebox.
For more information, refer to the
"Practical information - Changing a
fuse" section.
3
Ease of use and comfort
87
Mats
Removing
F Slide the front seat back as far as possible.
F Unclip the fixings.
F Remove the fixings, then the mat.
Retting
F Position the mat correctly.
F Clip the fixings.
F Check that the mat is held is place
correctly.
F Return the front seat to its original position.
Mats are provided for the driver and front
passenger.
To avoid any interference with the
pedals:
- only use mats which are suitable
for the fixings already present in the
vehicle; the use of these fixings is
essential,
- never fit more than 1 mat.
The use of a mat not approved by
CITROËN may obstruct access to the
pedals and hinder the cruise control/
speed limiter function.
Floor mats approved by CITROËN
are fitted with a third fixing located
in the pedal area to avoid any risk of
interference with the pedals.
Ease of use and comfort
88
Front armrest
Comfort and storage system for the driver and front passenger.
Adjustment
To optimise your driving position:
F lift the control A,
F push the armrest forwards.
The armrest returns to its initial position when
you push it rearwards.
USB port
The USB port allows the connection of a
portable device, such as a digital player of the
iPod
®
type or a USB memory stick.
The USB player reads your audio files, which
are sent to the audio system so that they can
be heard via the vehicle's speakers.
Compartment
The front armrest includes a cup holder and a
USB port and/or auxiliary JACK socket*.
F Lift the armrest for access to the cup
holder, USB port and/or auxiliary JACK
socket.
* Depending on equipment.
When connected to the USB port,
the portable device is recharged
automatically.
While charging, a message is displayed
if the power consumption of the
portable device exceeds the rating of
the vehicle's port.
Auxiliary Jack socket
The auxiliary Jack socket allows the connection
of a portable device, such as a digital player,
so that your audio files can be heard via the
vehicle's speakers.
The management of these files is from your
portable device.
For more information, refer to the
corresponding audio section in "Audio
and telematics".
The USB also allows a telephone to be
connected by a MirrorLink™ connection, so
that use can be made in the touch screen tablet
of certain applications on the telephone.
The management of these files is with the
steering mounted controls or from the audio
system.
3
Ease of use and comfort
89
Rear armrest
Comfort and storage system for the rear passengers.
Cup-holder
The rear cup-holder A is located in the rear
central armrest.
F Lower the rear armrest.
F Pull forwards to extract the cup-holder.
Storage
F Lift up the upper part of the rear central
armrest to access storage space B.
12 V accessory socket
This is located in the rear ashtray.
Max power: 100 W.
The connection of an electrical device
not approved by CITROËN, such as a
USB charger, may adversely affect the
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
causing faults such as poor telephone
reception or interference with displays
in the screens.
Rear ttings
Ease of use and comfort
90
Side blinds
F Pull the tab A to unreel the blind.
F Position the blind on the hook B.
Rear blind (Saloon)
F Pull the tab C to unreel the blind.
F Position the blind on the hooks D.
Ski flap
A flap in the backrest, located to the rear of the
armrest, facilitates the carrying of long objects.
To open
F Lower the rear armrest.
F Pull the flap handle down.
F Lower the flap.
F Load the objects from inside the boot.
Ensure that the objects are well secured
and that they do not impede the
operation of the gear lever.
3
Ease of use and comfort
91
Boot ttings (Saloon)
1. Boot floor
(storage for the spare wheel and the tools)
2. Boot lamp
3. Open storage or Closed storage well
For vehicles so equipped, this is the
location for the Hi-Fi amplifier.
Luggage securing rings
F Use the 4 securing rings on the boot floor
to secure your luggage.
For safety reasons in the event of sharp
braking, you are advised to place heavy
objects as far forward in the boot as
possible.
Ease of use and comfort
92
Boot ttings (Tourer)
1. Hook
For shopping bags.
2. Torch
To recharge, return it to its housing.
3. Storage net
1. Luggage-cover blind
(see details on following page)
2. Luggage stowing rings
Use the 4 stowing rings provided on the
boot floor to secure your loads.
1. Boot lamp
2. 12 V accessory socket (100 W maximum)
Cigarette lighter type 12 volt socket. It is
located on the rear right-hand trim.
3. Loading height control
You can change the height of the vehicle to
make loading or unloading the boot easier.
4. Hook
For shopping bags.
5. Storage net or Closed storage well
For vehicles so equipped, this is the
location for the Hi-Fi amplifier.
As a safety measure in the event of
sharp braking, you are advised to
place heavy objects as far forwards as
possible.
3. Hooks
These allow a high load net to be fitted
(see details on following page).
3
Ease of use and comfort
93
Luggage cover (Tourer)
To reel in
F Press the handle (PRESS) gently. The
luggage cover reels in automatically.
The moving part A can be folded along the rear
bench seat backrest.
To remove
F Compress the control 1 and lift the luggage
cover on the right then on the left to
remove it.
To install
F Position the left-hand end of the luggage
cover roller in its location B behind the rear
bench seat.
F Compress the roller control 1 and put the
roller in place in its location C on the right.
F Release the control to secure the luggage
cover.
F Unreel it to its fastening on the rear pillar.
Ease of use and comfort
94
High load retaining net
(Tourer)
Hooked onto the special upper and lower
fixings, this permits use of the entire loading
volume up to the roof:
- behind the rear seats (row 2),
- behind the front seats (row 1) when the rear
seats are folded.
When positioning the net, check that the strap
loops are visible from the boot; this will make
slackening or tightening easier.
Installation
F Fold down the backrests of the rear seats.
F Position the high load retaining net roller
above the two rails 1 located behind the
rear seats (2/3 bench seat). The two
notches 2 must be placed above the
two rails.
F Slide the two rails 1 into the notches 2 and
push the roller (lengthways) from right to
left to secure it.
F Reposition the rear seat backrests.
3
Ease of use and comfort
95
Row 1
To use it in row 1:
F fold down the backrests of the rear seats,
F open the covers 3 of the corresponding
upper fixings,
F unroll the high load retaining net and
position one of the ends of the net's metal
bar in the corresponding fixing cover.
Check that the hook is secured in the rail
located inside the cover 3,
F pull the high load retaining net's metal bar
to position the other hook in the second
fixing cover.
Row 2
To use it in row 2:
F open the covers 4 of the corresponding
upper fixings,
F from the rear bench seat, unroll the high
load retaining net, pushing it to detach it
from the retaining hooks,
F position one of the ends of the net's metal
bar in the corresponding fixing cover.
Check that the hook is secured in the rail,
located inside the cover 4,
F position the other hook in the second fixing
cover and pull the metal bar towards you.
96
Driving
Observe the driving regulations and remain
vigilant whatever the traffic conditions.
Pay close attention to the traffic and keep your
hands on the wheel so that you are ready to
react at any time to any eventuality.
On a long journey, a break every two hours is
strongly recommended.
In difficult weather, drive smoothly, anticipate
the need to brake and increase the distance
from other vehicles.
Driving on flooded
roads
We strongly advise against driving on flooded
roads, as this could cause serious damage
to the engine or gearbox, as well as to the
electrical systems of your vehicle.
Driving recommendations
Important!
Never drive with the parking brake
applied - Risk of overheating and
damage to the braking system!
Do not park or run the engine when
stationary in areas where inflammable
substances and materials (dry grass,
dead leaves...) might come into contact
with the hot exhaust system - Risk
of fire!
Never leave a vehicle unsupervised
with the engine running. If you have
to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, apply the parking brake
and put the gearbox into neutral or
position N or P, depending on the type
of gearbox.
If you are obliged to drive through water:
- check that the depth of water does not
exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves
that might be generated by other users,
- deactivate the Stop & Start system,
- drive as slowly as possible without
stalling. In all cases, do not exceed 6 mph
(10 km/h),
- do not stop and do not switch off the
engine.
On leaving the flooded road, as soon as
circumstances allow, make several light brake
applications to dry the brake discs and pads.
If in doubt on the state of your vehicle, contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
4
97
Driving
Anti-theft protection
Electronic engine immobiliser
The key contains an electronic chip which has
a special code. When the ignition is switched
on, this code must be recognised in order for
starting to be possible.
In the event of a fault, you are
informed by illumination of this
warning lamp, an audible signal and
a message in the screen.
In this case, your vehicle will not start; contact
a CITROËN dealer as soon as possible.
Starting-switching off the engine
Keep safely, away from your vehicle,
the label attached to the keys given to
you on acquisition of the vehicle.
Ignition switch
It has 3 positions:
- position 1 (Stop): insert and removing
the key,
- position 2 (Ignition on): steering column
unlocked, ignition on, Diesel preheating,
engine running,
- position 3 (Starting).
Ignition on position
It allows the use of the vehicle's electric
equipment or portable devices to be charged.
Avoid attaching heavy objects to the
key or the remote control, which would
weigh down on its blade in the ignition
switch and could cause a malfunction.
It could adversely affect the deployment
of the front airbag.
This electronic engine immobiliser locks the
engine management system a few moments
after the ignition is switched off and prevents
starting of the engine by anyone who does not
have the key.
Once the state of charge of the battery drops
to the reserve level, the system switches to
energy economy mode: the power supply is
cut off automatically to preserve the remaining
battery charge.
98
Driving
Starting the engine
Wait until this warning lamp goes off in the
instrument panel then operate the starter
motor by turning the key to position 3
without pressing the accelerator pedal,
until the engine starts. Once the engine is
running, release the key.
With the parking brake applied and the gearbox
in neutral or position N or P:
F depress the clutch pedal fully (manual
gearbox),
or
F press the brake pedal firmly (automatic
gearbox),
F insert the key into the ignition switch; the
system recognises the code,
F unlock the steering column by simultaneously
turning the steering and the key.
F With a petrol engine, operate the starter
motor by turning the key to position 3
without pressing the accelerator pedal,
until the engine starts. Once the engine is
running, release the key.
Never leave the engine running in
an enclosed area without adequate
ventilation: internal combustion
engines emit toxic exhaust gases,
such as carbon monoxide. Danger of
intoxication and death!
In very severe wintry conditions
(temperatures below -23°C), to ensure
the correct operation and durability of
the mechanical components of your
vehicle, engine and gearbox, it is
necessary to leave the engine running
for 4 minutes before moving off.
In wintry conditions, the warning lamp
can stay on for a longer period. When
the engine is hot, the warning lamp
does not come on.
In certain cases, you may have to apply
more force to the steering (wheels on
full lock, for example).
F With a Diesel engine, turn the key to
position 2, ignition on, to operate the
engine pre-heating system.
If the engine does not start straight
away, switch off the ignition. Wait a
few moments before operating the
starter motor again. If the engine does
not start after several attempts, do not
keep trying: you risk damaging the
starter motor or the engine. Contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
In temperate conditions, do not leave
the engine at idle to warm up but move
off straight away and drive at moderate
speed.
4
99
Driving
Do not flick the accelerator at the
moment of switching off the ignition.
This could cause serious damage to the
turbocharger(s).
Vehicles equipped with a
turbocharger
Never stop the engine without having allowed it
to run for a few seconds at idle, this being the
time required for the turbocharger to return to a
normal speed.
Energy economy mode
After switching off the engine (position 1-Stop),
for a maximum of 30 minutes you can still use
functions such as the audio and telematic
system, the wipers, dipped beam headlamps,
courtesy lamps, ...
Switching off the engine
F Stop the vehicle.
F With the engine running at idle, turn the key
to position 1.
F Remove the key from the ignition switch.
F To lock the steering column, turn the
steering until it locks.
When you leave the vehicle, keep the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
To facilitate unlocking of the steering
column, it is recommended that the
wheels be returned to the straight ahead
position before switching off the engine.
Never switch off the ignition before the
vehicle is at a complete stop. With the
engine off, the braking and steering
assistance systems are also cut off: risk
of loss of control of the vehicle.
For more information, refer to the
"Practical information" section, under
"Energy economy mode".
F Check that the parking brake is correctly
applied, particularly on sloping ground.
Key left in the "Ignition on"
position
On opening the driver's door, an alert
message is displayed, accompanied
by an audible signal, to remind you that
the key is still in the ignition switch at
position 1 (Stop).
If the key has been left in the ignition
switch at position 2 (Ignition on),
the ignition will be switched off
automatically after one hour.
To switch the ignition back on, turn the
key to position 1 (Stop), then back to
position 2 (Ignition on).
100
Driving
Manual parking brake
Mechanical device for immobilising the vehicle when stationary.
This warning lamp comes on if the
parking brake is engaged or not fully
released.
If the parking brake is released, the
illumination of this warning lamp along with
the STOP warning lamp indicates that the
brake fluid level is low or a fault with the brake
force distributor.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Application
F Pull the parking brake lever up to
immobilise your vehicle.
To facilitate the action on the lever, you are
recommended to press the brake pedal at the
same time.
Release
F Press on the end of the lever whilst pulling
it then lower it fully.
In all circumstances, as a precautionary
measure, engage first gear.
On steep gradients, turn the steering
wheel towards the pavement.
4
101
Driving
Electric parking brake
The electric parking brake combines
2 operating modes:
Automatic operation
Application with the engine off
With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake
is automatically applied when the engine is
switched off.
The application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
Application with the engine running
With the engine running and the vehicle
stationary, in order to immobilise the vehicle
you need to manually apply the parking brake
by pulling the control lever A.
The application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- warning lamp P in the control
lever A coming on,
- display of a message "Parking brake
applied" in the instrument panel screen.
- warning lamp P in the control
lever A coming on,
- display of a message "Parking brake
applied" in the instrument panel screen.
- this warning lamp in the
instrument panel coming on,
- this warning lamp in the
instrument panel coming on,
Before leaving the vehicle, check that
warning lamp P and the warning lamp
in the instrument panel are on fixed (not
flashing).
Never leave a child alone inside the
vehicle with the ignition on, as they
could release the parking brake.
Before leaving the vehicle, check that
warning lamp P and the warning lamp in the
instrument panel are on fixed (not flashing).
- Automatic
Automatic application when the engine
stops and automatic release on use of the
accelerator (activated by default).
- Manual
Manual application / release of the parking
brake is always possible by pulling control
lever A while pressing the brake pedal.
When the driver’s door is opened, a beep is
heard and a message displayed if the parking
brake has not been applied.
The noise of operation will confirm to you the
application/ release of the electric parking
brake.
102
Driving
Release
The electric parking brake releases
automatically and progressively when you
press the accelerator:
F with a manual gearbox (first gear or
reverse gear engaged), press down fully
on the clutch pedal then press on the
accelerator pedal and move off.
F with an automatic gearbox, accelerate
with the selector in position D, M or R.
Full release of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- warning lamp P in the control
lever A going off,
- display of a message "Parking brake
released" in the instrument panel screen.
Activation / Deactivation of the
automatic functions
Depending on the country of sale, automatic
application when switching off the engine and
automatic release when moving off can be
deactivated. The activation / deactivation is
done in the vehicle parameters menu.
Deactivation of these functions is
signalled by this warning lamp in the
instrument panel.
- this warning lamp in the
instrument panel going off,
In some special circumstances, with
the engine not running, (towing, icy
conditions...) the automatic parking
brake can be released manually, with
the key in the running position.
If the vehicle parameters menu does
not have the option to activate /
deactivate the automatic functions, this
can be done by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
With the automatic functions deactivated, the
parking brake must be applied and released
manually.
When stationary, with the engine
running, do not press the accelerator
pedal unnecessarily (particularly when
starting the engine, including in neutral),
as you may release the parking brake.
Do not place any object (packet of
cigarettes, telephone...) between the
gear lever and the electric parking
brake control.
4
103
Driving
Manual operation
Application
With the vehicle stationary, to apply the parking
brake whether the engine is running or off, pull
the control lever A.
The application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- warning lamp P in the control
lever A coming on,
- display of a message "Parking brake
applied" in the instrument panel screen.
- this warning lamp in the
instrument panel coming on,
When the driver’s door is opened with the
engine running, a message is displayed
accompanied by an audible signal if the
parking brake has not been applied.
Manual application / release of the parking
brake is always possible.
Release
With the ignition on or the engine running, to
release the parking brake, press on the brake
pedal, push then release control lever A.
The full application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- warning lamp P in the control
lever A going off,
- display of a message "Parking brake
released" in the instrument panel screen.
- this warning lamp in the
instrument panel going off,
When stationary, with the engine running, do
not press the accelerator pedal unnecessarily,
as you may release the parking brake.
If you push control lever A without pressing
the brake pedal, the parking brake will not be
released and the message "Foot on brake" will
be displayed in the instrument panel screen.
104
Driving
Maximum application
If necessary, you can make a maximum
application of the parking brake. It is obtained
by means of a long pull on control lever A,
until you see the message "Max application
of the parking brake" and an audible signal
is heard.
Maximum application is essential:
- in the case of a vehicle towing a caravan
or a trailer, if the automatic functions are
activated but you are applying the parking
brake manually,
- when the effective gradient you are parked
on is variable (e.g. on a ferry, in a lorry,
during towing).
Particular situations
In certain situations (starting the engine...), the
parking brake can automatically alter its level of
application. This is normal operation.
To advance your vehicle a few centimetres
without starting the engine, but with the ignition
on, press on the brake pedal and release the
parking brake by pushing then releasing
control lever A.
The full release of the parking brake is
confirmed by the warning lamp P in the control
lever and the warning lamp in the instrument
panel going off and the display of a message
"Parking brake released" in the instrument
panel screen.
To ensure correct operation of the parking
brake and therefore your safety, the number of
successive application/release operations is
limited to eight.
If this number is exceeded, you are warned by
the message "Parking brake faulty" and a
warning lamp flashes.
In the event of a battery failure, it will
not be possible to operate the electric
parking brake.
As a safety measure if the parking
brake is not applied, immobilise the
vehicle by engaging a gear or by
placing a chock against one of the
wheels.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Please note...
- in the case of towing, a loaded vehicle or
parking on a gradient, turn the front wheels
towards the pavement and engage a gear
when you park.
- after a maximum application, the release
time will be longer.
4
105
Driving
If a failure of the DSC system is
signalled by the illumination of this
warning lamp, then braking stability is
not guaranteed. In this event, stability
must be assured by the driver by
repeating alternate "pull - release"
actions on control lever A.
The dynamic emergency braking
should only be used in exceptional
circumstances.
If it is not possible to immobilise the
vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Dynamic emergency
braking
In the event of a failure of the vehicle’s main
braking system or in an exceptional situation
(e.g. driver taken ill, under instruction, etc) pull
and hold control lever A to stop the vehicle.
The dynamic stability control system (DSC)
provides stability during dynamic emergency
braking.
If there is a fault with the dynamic emergency
braking, one of the following messages will be
displayed in the instrument panel screen:
- "Parking brake faulty".
- "Parking brake control faulty".
106
Driving
SITUATION CONSEQUENCES
1
Electric parking brake problem and display of message
"Parking brake faulty" and the following warning
lamps:
If the electric parking brake problem warning lamp and the service warning
lamp come on, position the vehicle in a safe location (on flat ground, with a gear
engaged).
2
Display of the messages "Parking brake faulty" and
"Anti roll-back fault" and of the following warning
lamps:
- The automatic functions are deactivated.
- The hill start assist is not available.
- The electric parking brake is only available manually.
3
Display of messages "Parking brake faulty" and "Anti
roll-back fault" and of the following warning lamp:
- Manual release of the electric parking brake is not available.
- The hill start assist is not available.
- The automatic functions and manual application are still available.
If any of these instances arises, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
Operating faults
4
107
Driving
SITUATION CONSEQUENCES
4
Display of messages "Parking brake faulty" and "Anti
roll-back fault" and of the following warning lamps:
and/or flashing
- The automatic functions are deactivated.
- The hill start assist is not available.
To apply the electric parking brake:
F Immobilise the vehicle and switch off the ignition
F Pull the control lever for at least 5 seconds or until maximum application.
F Switch on the ignition and check that the electric parking brake warning lamps
are on.
- Application may take longer than in normal operation.
- If warning lamp (!) flashes or if the warning lamps do not come on when the
ignition is switched on, this method does not work. Have it checked by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
To release the electric parking brake:
F Switch on the ignition.
F Push the control lever and hold it for approximately 3 seconds.
5
Display of message "Parking brake control faulty –
automatic mode activated" and the following warning
lamps:
and/or flashing
- Only the functions for automatic application on switching off the engine and
automatic release on acceleration are available.
- Manual application/release of the electric parking brake and dynamic
emergency braking are unavailable.
6
Display of message "Parking brake faulty" and of the
following warning lamp:
flashing
- Application of the parking brake is not guaranteed.
- The parking brake is temporarily unavailable.
It this situation arises:
F Wait approximately 3 minutes.
F After 3 minutes, if the warning lamp is still flashing, try to reinitialise the parking
brake, either by pushing and releasing the control A while pressing the brake
pedal or by means of a long pull on control lever A.
7
Battery problem - Illumination of the battery warning lamp makes it essential to stop the vehicle
as soon as traffic allows. Stop and immobilise your vehicle.
- Apply the electric parking brake before switching off the engine.
108
Driving
Hill start assist
System which keeps your vehicle immobilised
temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when
starting on a gradient, the time to move your
foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator
pedal.
This function is only active when:
- the vehicle is completely stationary, with
your foot on the brake pedal,
- in certain conditions on a gradient,
- with the driver’s door closed.
The hill start assist function cannot be
deactivated.
Operation
On an ascending gradient, with the vehicle
stationary, the vehicle is held for a brief
moment when you release the brake pedal:
- provided you are in first gear or neutral on
a manual gearbox,
- provided you are in D or M on an automatic
gearbox.
On a descending gradient, with the vehicle
stationary and reverse gear engaged, the
vehicle is held for a brief moment when you
release the brake pedal.
Do not exit the vehicle while it is being
held in the hill start assist phase.
If you need to leave the vehicle with the
engine running, apply the parking brake
manually and ensure that the parking
brake warning lamp (in the instrument
panel) is on fixed (not flashing).
4
109
Driving
6-speed manual gearbox
F Move the lever fully to the right to
engage 5
th
or 6
th
gear.
Engaging 5
th
or 6
th
gear Engaging reverse
gear
Only engage reverse gear when the
vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
Failure to follow this advice may cause
permanent damage to the gearbox
(engagement of 3
rd
or 4
th
gear by
mistake).
F Raise the ring under the knob and move
the gear lever to the left then forwards.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate
starting of the engine:
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.
110
Driving
Mode selection
Displays in the instrument panel
F Automatic mode: gear selector in
position D.
F Manual mode: gear selector in position M.
F SPORT programme: gear selector in
position D and button A pressed.
F SNOW programme: gear selector in
position D and button B pressed.
The position of the gear selector and the driving
mode are displayed in the right hand dial of the
instrument panel.
A position grille associated with the gear selector
allows you to view the selected position.
Automatic gearbox
Automatic gearbox which offers a choice
between the comfort of fully automatic
operation, enhanced by the sport and snow
programmes, or manual gear changing.
Two driving modes are provided:
- automatic operation for electronic control
of the gears by the gearbox, associated
with:
● a SPORT programme for a more
dynamic driving style,
● a SNOW programme to improve driving
when the grip is poor,
- manual operation for sequential changing
of the gears by the driver.
As a safety measure:
- position P can be disengaged only
by pressing the brake pedal,
- when a door is opened, an audible
signal is heard if the gear selector
is not in position P,
- always make sure that the gear
selector is in position P before you
leave your vehicle.
If the gearbox is in position P but the
position of the gear selector is different,
reposition the gear selector at P so that
you can start the vehicle.
4
111
Driving
Moving off
F To start the engine, the gear selector must
be in position P or N.
F Operate the starter.
F When the engine is running, place the gear
selector at R, D or M.
F Check in the instrument panel, the position
engaged.
F Release the brake pedal and accelerate.
F To avoid a possible difference between the
position of the gear selector and the actual
position of the gearbox, always come out
of position P with the ignition on and brake
pedal applied.
Otherwise, when the ignition is on or the engine
is running:
F reposition the gear selector at position P,
F put your foot on the brake pedal and then
select the gear you want.
Park
This position of the gear selector
is used to prevent the vehicle from
moving when you are stationary.
Reverse gear
Only engage this position when the
vehicle is stationary. To prevent
snatching, do not accelerate too soon
after selection.
Neutral
Never select position N if the vehicle
is moving.
F To select position P, move the gear selector
back to the highest position (towards R),
then push it forwards and then to the left.
F To exit position P, move the gear selector to
the right and then to the position you want.
F Only engage this position when the vehicle
is completely stationary. In this position,
the front wheels are locked. Make sure that
the gear selector is correctly positioned.
Never select position P or R if the
vehicle is not stationary.
If, while the vehicle is moving,
position N is engaged inadvertently,
allow the engine to idle before engaging
position D or M.
112
Driving
Automatic operation
F Move the gear selector to position D.
The gearbox continuously selects the
gear that is best suited to the following
conditions:
- driving style,
- road profile,
- vehicle load.
When braking, the gearbox may change down
automatically in order to provide effective
engine braking.
If you lift your foot off the accelerator abruptly,
the gearbox will not engage a higher gear.
Manual operation
Position of the gear selector for manual gear
changing.
F Move the gear selector to position M.
F Push the gear selector towards the "+" sign
to change up a gear.
F Pull the gear selector towards the "-" sign
to change down a gear.
If the vehicle stops or reduces speed
(for example when approaching a stop sign),
the gearbox changes down automatically, to
first gear if the speed drops sufficiently.
In manual mode, it is not necessary to release
the accelerator during gear changes.
Gear change instructions are accepted only if
the engine speed permits it.
The SPORT and SNOW programmes do not
operate in manual mode.
For certain manoeuvres (for example
overtaking), you can obtain maximum
acceleration by pressing the accelerator pedal
hard down past the point of resistance, which
then produces an automatic change down to a
lower gear.
The gearbox operates without requiring any
intervention on your part.
4
113
Driving
SPORT and SNOW
programmes
SPORT programme "S"
These two special programmes supplement
the automatic operation in very particular
conditions of use.
F With the gear selector in position D and the
engine running, press button A.
The gearbox automatically favours a dynamic
driving style.
SNOW programme "T"
F With the gear selector in position D and the
engine running, press button B.
The gearbox adapts to driving on slippery
roads.
This programme makes moving off easier and
improves traction in conditions of poor grip.
T appears in the instrument panel.
S appears in the instrument panel.
Return to automatic operation
F At any time, press the button selected
again to exit from the programme engaged
and return to auto-adaptive mode.
A strong snatch may be felt when
selecting R for reverse gear.
In the event of a fault, the gearbox is
blocked in one gear; do not exceed a
speed of 62 mph (100 km/h).
Do not turn off the engine while the gear
selector is in position D or R.
Never press the accelerator and brake
pedals simultaneously. Braking and
acceleration should be done with the
right foot only. Pressing both pedals
simultaneously may damage the
gearbox.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If the ambient temperature is
below -23°C, the engine should be left
running at idle for four minutes, in order
to ensure the correct operation and
durability of the engine and gearbox.
114
Driving
System which reduces fuel consumption by recommending the most appropriate
gear.
Depending on the driving situation and your
vehicle's equipment, the system may advise
you to skip one (or more) gear(s). You can
follow this instruction without engaging the
intermediate gears.
The gear engagement recommendations must
not be considered compulsory. In fact, the
configuration of the road, the amount of traffic
and safety remain determining factors when
choosing the best gear. Therefore, the driver
remains responsible for deciding whether or not
to follow the advice given by the system.
This function cannot be deactivated.
Example:
- You are in third gear.
- You press the accelerator pedal.
Gear efciency indicator*
Operation
With an automatic gearbox, the system
is only active in manual mode.
* Depending on engine.
On BlueHDi Diesel 150 versions with manual
gearbox, the system may suggest changing into
neutral so that the engine can go into standby
(STOP mode with Stop & Start), in certain
driving conditions. In this case, N is displayed
in the instrument panel.
The information appears in the instrument
panel in the form of an arrow.
On vehicle fitted with a manual gearbox,
the arrow may be accompanied by the gear
recommended.
The system adapts its gear change
recommendation according to the
driving conditions (slope, load, ...) and
the demands of the driver (power,
acceleration, braking, ...).
The system never suggests:
- engaging first gear,
- engaging reverse gear.
- The system may suggest that you engage
a higher gear.
4
115
Driving
Stop & Start
Operation
- with a manual gearbox, at speeds below
12 mph (20 km/h) with BlueHDi Diesel
versions, when you put the gear lever into
neutral and release the clutch pedal,
- with an automatic gearbox, vehicle
stationary, when you press the brake pedal
or place the gear lever in position N.
Going into engine STOP
mode
The "ECO" warning lamp comes on
in the instrument panel and the engine
goes into standby automatically:
If your vehicle is fitted with the
system, a time counter calculates
the sum of the periods in STOP
mode during a journey. It resets
itself to zero every time the ignition
is switched on with the key.
Special cases: STOP mode
unavailable
In this case, the "ECO" warning
lamp flashes for a few seconds, then
goes off.
This operation is perfectly normal.
STOP mode is not invoked when:
- the vehicle is on a steep slope
(up or down),
- the driver's door is open,
- the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
- the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph
(10 km/h) since the last engine start using
the key,
- the electric parking brake is applied or
being applied,
- the engine is needed to maintain a
comfortable temperature in the passenger
compartment,
- demisting is active,
- some special conditions (battery charge,
engine temperature, braking assistance,
ambient temperature...) where the engine is
needed to assure control of a system.
The Stop & Start system puts the engine temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams, or other...).
The engine restarts automatically - START mode - as soon as you want to move off. The restart takes place instantly, quickly and silently.
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions as well as the noise level when stationary.
STOP mode does not affect the functionality of
the vehicle, such as braking, power steering,
for example.
Never refuel with the engine in STOP
mode; you must switch off the ignition
with the key.
116
Driving
- with a manual gearbox, when you fully
depress the clutch pedal,
- with an automatic gearbox:
● gear lever in position D or M, when you
release the brake pedal,
● or gear lever in position N and brake
pedal released, when you place the gear
lever in position D or M,
● or when you engage reverse gear.
Going into engine START
mode
The "ECO" warning lamp goes off
and the engine starts automatically:
Special cases: START invoked
automatically
In this case the "ECO" warning
lamp flashes for few seconds, then
goes off.
This operation is perfectly normal.
For safety reasons or to ensure smooth
operation, START mode is invoked
automatically when:
- you open the driver's door,
- you unfasten the driver's seat belt,
- the speed of the vehicle exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) with a manual gearbox or 2 mph
(3 km/h) with an an automatic gearbox for
BlueHDi Diesel versions,
- the electric parking brake is being applied,
- some special conditions (battery charge,
engine temperature, braking assistance,
ambient temperature...) where the engine is
needed to assure control of a system.
With a manual gearbox in STOP mode,
if a gear is engaged without fully
depressing the clutch pedal, a warning
lamp comes on or an alert message
is displayed asking you to depress the
clutch pedal to restart the engine.
4
117
Driving
Reactivation
Press the "ECO OFF" switch again.
The system is active again; this is confirmed
by the switch warning lamp going off and the
display of a message.
The system is reactivated automatically
at every new start using the key.
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction with the system,
the "ECO OFF" switch warning lamp flashes,
then comes on continuously.
have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
At any time, press the "ECO OFF" switch to
deactivate the system.
This is confirmed by the switch warning lamp
coming on accompanied by the display of a
message.
Deactivation
If the system has been deactivated
in STOP mode, the engine restarts
immediately.
In the event of a fault in STOP
mode, the vehicle may stall. All of
the instrument panel warning lamps
come on.
Depending on version, an alert
message may also be displayed asking
you to put the gear lever into position N
and put your foot on the brake pedal.
It is then necessary to switch off the
ignition, then restart the engine using
the key.
118
Driving
Tyre under-ination detection
System which automatically checks the
pressures of the tyres while driving.
The system continuously monitors the
pressures of the four tyres, as soon as the
vehicle is moving.
The tyre under-inflation detection
system is an aid to driving which does
not replace the need for vigilance on
the part of the driver.
This system does not avoid the need
to check the tyre pressures regularly
(including the spare wheel) and before
a long journey.
Driving with under-inflated tyres
adversely affects road holding,
extends braking distances and causes
premature tyre wear, particularly under
arduous conditions (vehicle loaded,
high speed, long journey).
The tyre pressures for your vehicle can
be found on the tyre pressure label (see
the "Identification markings" section).
The tyre pressures must be checked
when the tyres cold (vehicle stopped
for 1 hour or after driving for less then
6 miles (10 km) at moderate speed).
Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the values
indicated on the label.
Driving with under-inflated tyres
increases fuel consumption.
A pressure sensor is located in the valve of
each tyre (except the spare wheel).
The system triggers an alert if a drop in
pressure is detected in one or more tyres.
Maintenance
Before doing any work under the
bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start
system to avoid the risk of injury related
to an automatic change to START
mode.
This system requires the use of a 12 V battery
of specific technology and characteristics
(reference numbers available from a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop).
Fitting a battery not listed by CITROËN would
introduces the risk of faults with the system.
The Stop & Start system makes use of
an advanced technology. All work on
this type of battery must only be carried
out by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
4
119
Driving
The loss of pressure detected does not
always lead to visible deformation of the
tyre. Do not rely on just a visual check.
The alert is maintained until the tyre or
tyres concerned is reinflated, repaired
or replaced.
The spare wheel (space-saver type or a
steel rim) does not have a sensor.
Under-inflation alert
The alert is given by the fixed illumination
of this warning lamp, accompanied by
an audible signal, and depending on
equipment, the display of a message.
In the event of a problem on one of the tyres,
the symbol or the message appears, according
to equipment, to identify it.
F Reduce speed, avoid sudden steering
movements or harsh brake applications.
F Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
F If you have a compressor (the one in the
temporary puncture repair kit for example),
check the four tyre pressures when cold.
If it is not possible to check the tyre
pressures at the time, drive carefully at
reduced speed.
or
F In the event of a puncture, use the
temporary puncture repair kit or the spare
wheel (according to equipment).
Operating fault
The flashing and then fixed
illumination of the under-inflation
warning lamp accompanied by
the illumination of the service warning lamp
indicates a fault with the system.
In this case, monitoring of the tyre pressures is
not assured.
This alert is also displayed when one or more
wheels is not fitted with a sensor (for example,
a space-saver or steel spare wheel).
Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked
or, following the repair of a puncture, to
have the original wheel, equipped with a
sensor, refitted.
Any tyre repair or replacement on a
wheel fitted with this system must be
carried out by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If after changing a tyre, a wheel is not
detected by your vehicle (fitting snow
tyres for example), you must have the
system reinitialised by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
120
Driving
Fixed centred controls steering wheel
1
Rotate
Scroll the various pages of information in the instrument panel screen.
Move through the various menus in the instrument panel screen.
Increase / Decrease values.
Short press
Open the main menu in the instrument panel screen (only when stationary).
Select and confirm information.
Long press
Reset the trip data for the trip selected (if the corresponding trip computer page is
displayed).
2
Short press
Cancel the current operation.
Return to the previous screen in the instrument panel screen.
Long press Return to the initial page in the instrument panel screen.
3
Short press Increase the speed in steps of 1 mph (1 km/h) / Store the speed.
Press and hold Increase the speed in steps of 5 mph (5 km/h).
4
Short press Decrease the speed in steps of 1 mph (1 km/h) / Store the speed.
Press and hold Decrease the speed in steps of 5 mph (5 km/h).
5 Short press
Suspend or resume cruise control/speed limiter (depending on the mode
selected).
6 Short press
Select cruise control or speed limiter mode (the cycle on this button will always
begin with selection of the speed limiter).
7 Short press Deactivate cruise control/speed limiter.
8
Short press
Accept an incoming call.
End the current call.
Open the telephone short-cut menu.
Confirm in the list and in the telephone menu.
Long press Reject an incoming call.
9 Short press / Long press Horn.
10 Short press Activate / Deactivate Black Panel mode (comfortable night driving display).
11 Long press Activate voice recognition on the telephone via MirrorLink.
4
121
Driving
12
Rotate
Radio: Scroll the pre-set stations.
CD / MP3 / jukebox: Scroll through tracks or folders.
Multifunction screen menus: Move and increase / decrease.
Short press
Multifunction screen menus: confirm the selection.
Open the short-cut menus (depending on the page displayed in the
multifunction screen).
13
Short press
Cancel the current operation and return to the previous display in the
multifunction screen.
Reject an incoming call.
Long press Return to the initial page in the multifunction screen.
14 Short press Access to the multifunction screen main menu.
15 Short press / Press and hold Volume increase.
16 Short press / Press and hold Volume decrease.
17 Short press
First press: mute.
Second press: restore sound.
18
Short press
Radio: Automatic search of higher frequencies.
CD / MP3 / jukebox: Search for the next track.
Maintained press CD / MP3 / jukebox: fast play in fast forward.
19
Short press
Radio: Automatic search of lower frequencies.
CD / MP3 / jukebox: Search for the previous track.
Press and hold CD / MP3 / jukebox: Fast play in fast back.
20
Short press
Radio: display the list of radio stations.
CD / MP3: display the list of tracks and folders.
Jukebox: display the list of albums.
Long press Update the list of radio stations.
21 Short press / Long press Horn.
22 Short press MODE: select the function displayed in the multifunction screen.
122
Driving
Speed limiter
Steering mounted controls
The speed limiter switches are located on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel.
1. Increase the programmed speed.
2. Decrease the programmed speed.
3. Speed limiter On / Pause.
4. Select speed limiter mode.
5. Deactivate the speed limiter.
Displays in the instrument panel
The information related to the speed limiter is
grouped together in zone A of the instrument
panel.
System which prevents the vehicle from
exceeding the speed programmed by the
driver.
When the limit speed is reached, the
accelerator pedal no longer has any effect.
The speed limiter is switched on manually: a
speed of at least 20 mph (approx. 30 km/h)
must be programmed.
The speed limiter can in no circumstances
replace keeping to speed limits or the
need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
4
123
Driving
F Press button 4 to select "LIMIT" speed
limiter mode.
The selection is confirmed by the display of the
"LIMIT" function in zone A of the instrument panel.
Activation
F Press button 3 when the desired maximum
speed is displayed.
The information "ON" then appears in zone A
of the instrument panel.
When the function is selected, the
last memorised speed and the
information "PAUSE" are displayed.
With the engine running, you can adjust the
memorised maximum speed, displayed in
zone A, by pressing:
F Button 1 to increase the memorised
maximum speed.
F Button 2 to decrease the memorised
maximum speed.
Successive presses will modify the limit
speed setting in steps of 1 mph (km/h) and a
continuous press in steps of 5 mph (km/h).
Programming
F Press button 3.
This action causes the information "PAUSE" to
appear in zone A of the instrument panel.
This action does not cancel the memorised
maximum speed which remains displayed in
zone A of the instrument panel.
Pause / Resume
124
Driving
The accelerator pedal has a stiff point at the
end of its travel. To exceed the maximum speed
setting at any time, you can press the pedal
all the way down. While the speed is being
exceeded, the speed displayed in zone A will
flash. Simply release the accelerator pedal to
return below the maximum speed and restore
the limiter function.
Return to normal
driving
Operating fault
If there is a fault, a message is displayed
accompanied by an audible signal and
illumination of the SERVICE warning lamp.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Exceeding the programmed
speed
In the event of a steep descent or
under excessive acceleration, the
speed limiter (which does not act
on the brakes) may not be able to
prevent the vehicle from exceeding the
programmed speed.
Use of a floor mat other than that
recommended by CITROËN may affect
the normal operation of the accelerator
pedal and hamper the operation of the
speed limiter.
Floor mats approved by CITROËN
are fitted with a 3rd fixing located in
the pedal area to avoid any risk of
interference with the pedals.
The speed will also flash if the speed limiter is
not able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding
the programmed speed setting (e.g. on a steep
descent or under excessive acceleration).
To reactivate the speed limiter, release the
accelerator to slow to a speed lower than the
programmed speed.
F Press button 5.
F Or select the speed limiter function.
F Or stop the engine.
4
125
Driving
Cruise control
Displays in the instrument panel
The information related to the cruise control is
grouped together in zone A of the instrument
panel.
Steering mounted controls
The cruise control switches are located on the
left-hand side of the steering wheel.
1. Activate the cruise control at the current
speed of the vehicle, then increase the
programmed speed.
2. Activate the cruise control at the current
speed of the vehicle, then decrease the
programmed speed.
3. Pause / Restore the cruise control.
4. Select cruise control mode.
5. Deactivate the cruise control.
System which automatically maintains the
vehicle speed programmed by the driver,
without any action on the accelerator pedal.
The cruise control is switched on manually:
the vehicle speed must be at least 25 mph
(40 km/h) and you must be in at least:
- 4th gear for a manual gearbox,
- 2nd gear for an automatic gearbox.
The driver must remain attentive and in
complete control of the vehicle.
You are recommended to keep your feet
within range of the pedals.
126
Driving
Exceeding the programmed
speed
While cruise control is in operation, it is always
possible to go above the programmed speed
simply by pressing the accelerator pedal (for
example to overtake another vehicle).
The speed displayed in zone A flashes.
You only have to release the accelerator pedal
to return to the programmed speed.
Programming
The selection is confirmed by the display of the
"CRUISE" function in zone A of the instrument
panel.
When the function is selected, no cruising
speed has yet been memorised.
Once the desired speed has been reached
using the accelerator, press button 1 or 2. The
cruising speed is then memorised and cruise
control is activated. The cruising speed is
displayed in zone A of the instrument panel,
and "ON" is displayed.
Adjusting the memorised
speed while the cruise
control is in operation
You can adjust the memorised speed,
displayed in zone A, by pressing:
- Button 1 to increase the speed.
- Button 2 to reduce the speed.
Successive presses will modify the cruise
speed in steps of 1 mph (km/h) and a
continuous press in steps of 5 mph (km/h).
You can then release the accelerator pedal.
The vehicle will automatically keep to the speed
chosen.
The vehicle speed may vary slightly from that
memorised.
If during cruise control the system cannot keep
to the cruise speed (e.g. on a steep descent),
then the speed flashes. If necessary, brake to
curb your speed.
F Press button 4 to select "CRUISE" cruise
control mode.
4
127
Driving
Reactivation
- By recalling the memorised speed
After deactivation, press button 3. Your
vehicle automatically returns to the
memorised cruise speed setting. The
memorised speed and "ON" are displayed
in zone A.
If the memorised cruise speed setting is
higher than the current speed, the vehicle
will accelerate strongly to reach the current
speed.
- By selecting the current speed
Press button 1 or 2 once the desired speed
has been reached.
The new speed and "ON" will appear in
zone A.
Return to normal driving
F Press button 5.
F Or select the cruise control function.
F Or stop the engine.
The speed that was chosen is no longer
memorised.
"PAUSE" will then be displayed in zone A of
the instrument panel.
These actions do not cancel the cruise
speed setting which remains displayed in the
instrument panel.
Operating fault
If there is a fault, a message is displayed
accompanied by an audible signal and
illumination of the SERVICE warning lamp.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Cruise control must only be used where
the traffic conditions permit driving at a
constant speed.
Do not use it on congested roads or
when the weather or the road conditions
are poor.
Pause / Resume
F Either by pressing the brake or clutch
pedal.
F Or by pressing button 3.
F Or by the DSC or ASR systems being
active.
For vehicles with a manual gearbox, cruise
control is deactivated if the gear lever is in
neutral.
128
Driving
Lane departure warning system
This system is particularly useful on motorways
and main roads.
Activation
F When switching the ignition on or with
the engine running, press this button; the
indicator lamp comes on.
Deactivation
F Press this button again, the indicator lamp
goes off.
The status of the system remains in the
memory when the ignition is switched off.
Detection
You are warned by the vibration of the driver's
seat cushion:
- on the right-hand side, if the marking on
the ground has been crossed on the right,
- on the left-hand side, if the marking on the
ground has been crossed on the left.
No warning is transmitted while the direction
indicator is active and for approximately
20 seconds after the direction indicator is
switched off.
A warning may be transmitted if a direction
marking (e.g. arrow) or non-standard marking
(e.g. graffiti) is crossed.
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction, the service
warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message in the screen.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
System which detects the involuntary crossing
of longitudinal traffic lane markings on the
ground (solid or broken line).
Sensors, fitted below the front bumper, trigger
a warning if the vehicle drifts over a lane
marking (speed higher than 50 mph (80 km/h)).
The detection may be impeded:
- if the sensors are dirty (mud, snow...),
- if the markings on the ground are
worn,
- if there is little contrast between the
markings on the ground and the road
surface.
The lane departure warning system
cannot in any circumstances replace
the need for vigilance on the part of the
driver.
It is necessary to observe driving
regulations and take a break every
two hours.
4
129
Driving
Parking space sensors
System which measures the parking space
available between two vehicles or obstacles. It
measures the size of the space and gives you
information on:
- the possibility of fitting into a free space,
depending on the dimensions of your
vehicle and the distances necessary for
your manoeuvres,
- the level of difficulty of the manoeuvre to
be performed.
The system does not measure spaces which
are clearly much smaller or larger than the size
of the vehicle.
The parking space sensor system warning
lamp can have three different states:
- off: the system is not selected,
- on fixed: the system is selected but the
conditions for measuring are not yet met
(direction indicator not operating, speed too
high) or the measurement is terminated.
- flashing: measurement is in progress or
the message is being displayed.
You can select the "parking space sensor"
system by pressing button A. The fixed
illumination of the warning lamp indicates that
the system is selected.
During the measurement, the message
"Measurement in progress - Vmax 20 km/h
(12 mph)" is displayed in the instrument panel
screen.
Displays in the instrument panel
130
Driving
Operation
You have identified a parking space:
F Press button A to select the system.
F Activate the direction indicator on the side
where the space is to be measured.
F During measurement, go forward the
length of the space, at a speed less than
12 mph (approx. 20 km/h), to prepare for
your manoeuvre.
The system then measures the size of the space.
F The system informs you of the level
of difficulty of the manoeuvre via a
message in the instrument panel screen
accompanied by an audible signal.
F Depending on the message issued by the
system, you may or may not be able to
perform the manoeuvre.
The system displays the following types of message:
Parking YES
Parking DIFFICULT
Parking NO
The system is deselected automatically:
- when you engage reverse gear,
- when you switch off the ignition,
- if measurement is not requested,
- within five minutes of selection of the
system,
- if the vehicle speed exceeds the
threshold of 45 mph (approx. 70 km/h) for
one minute.
If the lateral distance between your vehicle and
the parking space is too large, the system may
not be able to measure the space.
The system remains available after each
measurement and thus can measure more than
one space during your search.
In bad weather conditions or in winter, make
sure that the sensors are not covered by dirt, or
by ice or snow.
The parking space sensor system deactivates
the front parking sensors during space
measurement when you are in forward gear.
If there is a fault, have the system
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
4
131
Driving
Parking sensors
Operation
The parking sensors system cannot, in
any circumstances, replace the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver.
This system detects any obstacle (person,
vehicle, tree, barrier...) located in front of or
behind the vehicle, however, it will not be able
to detect obstacles located immediately below
the bumper.
An object, such as a stake, a roadworks cone
or any other similar object may be detected at
the start of the manoeuvre but may no longer
be detected when the vehicle moves nearer
to it.
At the front and/or at the rear
This system is comprised of proximity sensors,
installed in the front and/or rear bumper.
Visual and audible assistance
The proximity information is indicated by:
- an audible signal which becomes more rapid
as the vehicle approaches the obstacle,
- a diagram in the multifunction screen, with
blocks which move closer to the vehicle.
The obstacle is located in relation to the emission
of the audible signal by the speakers; front or rear
and right or left.
When the distance between the vehicle and
the obstacle is less than approximately thirty
centimetres, the audible signal becomes
continuous and/or the "Danger" symbol appears,
depending on the multifunction screen version.
In bad weather or in winter, ensure
that the sensors are not covered with
mud, ice or snow. When reverse gear is
engaged, an audible signal (long beep)
indicates that the sensors may be dirty.
When the speed of the vehicle is below
about 6 mph (10 km/h), some sources
of noise (motorcycle, lorry, pneumatic
drill, ...) may trigger the audible parking
sensor signals.
The parking sensors are switched on:
- by engaging reverse gear,
- at a speed below 6 mph (10 km/h) in
forward gear.
This is accompanied by an audible signal and
the display of the vehicle in the multifunction
screen.
The parking sensors are switched off:
- when you exit reverse gear,
- when the speed is higher than 6 mph
(10 km/h) in forward gear,
- when the vehicle has been stationary for
more than three seconds in forward gear.
132
Driving
Reactivation
Deactivation
The system will be deactivated
automatically when a trailer is being
towed or when a bicycle carrier is fitted
(towbar or bicycle carrier recommended
by CITROËN).
With the control on the
dashboard
F Press control A to deactivate the system.
This is confirmed by the illumination of the
indicator lamp in the control.
With the touch screen tablet
F Press the MENU button.
F In the main menu, select the "Driving"
menu.
F Go to the secondary page, then select
"Vehicle settings".
F Uncheck the "Parking sensors" line to
deactivate the system.
F Press on "Confirm" to save the
modification and quit.
With the control on the
dashboard
F Press control A again to reactivate the
system.
This is confirmed by the indicator lamp in the
control going off.
With the touch screen tablet
F Press the MENU button again
F In the main menu, select the "Driving"
menu.
F Go to the secondary page, then select
"Vehicle settings".
F Check the "Parking sensors" line to
reactivate the system.
F Press on "Confirm" to save the
modification and quit.
4
133
Driving
Reversing camera (Tourer)
A reversing camera is activated automatically
when reverse gear is engaged.
The image is displayed in the navigation
screen.
The space between the blue lines represents
the width of your vehicle except for the door
mirrors.
The blue lines represent the general direction
of the vehicle.
The red lines represent a distance of about
30 cm beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear
bumper.
The green lines represent distances of
about 1 and 2 metres beyond the edge of your
vehicle's rear bumper.
The projected lines displayed in the
screen do not allow the vehicle to
be placed relative to tall obstacles
(vehicles that are close for example).
Deformation of the image is normal.
Clean the reversing camera regularly
using a sponge and a soft cloth.
When cleaning the vehicle with a high
pressure jet wash, keep the lance
at least 30 cm from the lens of the
camera.
This system is a driving aid that does
not replace the need for vigilance on
the part of the driver, who must retain
control of their vehicle at all times.
134
Driving
"Hydractive III +" electronic suspension
The suspension automatically and instantly
adjusts to different driving styles and to
the profile of the road, providing the best
compromise between occupant comfort and
vehicle road holding.
The system alternates between soft and firm
suspension settings, maximising comfort at the
same time as constantly ensuring the highest
level of safety. It also automatically corrects
ride height, according to the vehicle load and
driving conditions.
In addition, the "Hydractive III +" system
allows you to choose between two modes of
suspension.
A change of suspension mode can be made
either when the vehicle is moving or when
stationary, by pressing button A.
Display in the instrument panel
The suspension mode selected is displayed in
the instrument panel screen.
Normal mode
This mode favours soft damping for
maximum comfort.
If the speed authorised for a
particular position is exceeded, the
vehicle reverts automatically to the
normal road position.
SPORT mode
This mode favours dynamic driving.
The warning lamp on button A comes
on in addition to the message in the
instrument panel screen.
SPORT mode is retained when you
switch off the engine.
Vehicle positions
Position changes may only be made when
the engine is running.
The adjustable ground clearance meets all
types of situation. Apart from a few specific
situations, the vehicle should be in the Normal
position.
F Press once on one of the adjustment
controls.
The change in position is indicated by a
message on the instrument panel screen.
4
135
Driving
Request not granted
The instrument panel screen temporarily displays a
message indicating that this position is not authorised.
The vehicle remains in the authorised position and the
instrument panel screen indicates this position to you.
Automatic variation of ground clearance
- If your speed exceeds 70 mph (approx.
110 km/h), on a good road surface, ground
clearance is lowered. The vehicle returns
to its normal position if the road surface
deteriorates or if your speed is lower than
55 mph (approx. 90 km/h).
- At low or medium speed, if the road surface
is poor, ground clearance is increased. The
vehicle returns to its normal position as
soon as conditions allow.
- On switching off the ignition, the ground
clearance is reduced to the parking position
Normal position
If the speed authorised for a particular position
is exceeded, the vehicle reverts automatically
to the normal position.
Low position
To facilitate loading or unloading the vehicle.
For workshop inspections.
Not to be used in normal driving (not possible
if speed > 6 mph (10 km/h)).
High position
Changing a wheel (not possible if
speed > 6 mph (10 km/h)).
Mid-high position
For increased ground clearance (not possible
if speed > 25 mph (40 km/h)).
For use on difficult roads when travelling at
reduced speed, as well as on car park ramps.
For your safety if you are operating
underneath the vehicle, you must
support the vehicle with axle stands.
136
Visibility
Exterior lighting controls
Main lighting
The various front and rear lamps of the
vehicle are designed to adapt the driver's
visibility progressively in relation to the climatic
conditions:
- sidelamps, to be seen,
- dipped beam headlamps to see without
dazzling other drivers,
- main beam headlamps to see clearly when
the road is clear.
Additional lighting
Other lamps are fitted to fulfil the requirements
of particular driving conditions:
- a rear foglamp to be seen from a distance,
- front foglamps for even better forward
vision,
- directional headlamps for improved
visibility when cornering,
- daytime running lamps to be seen during
the day.
Settings
Various automatic lighting control modes are
also available depending on options:
- daytime running lamps,
- automatic illumination of headlamps,
- directional lighting,
- guide-me-home lighting.
In some weather conditions (e.g. low
temperature or humidity), the presence
of misting on the internal surface of the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps
is normal; it disappears after the lamps
have been on for a few minutes.
Control stalk for the selection and control of the various front and rear lamps providing the vehicle's lighting.
5
137
Visibility
Manual controls
Lighting off (ignition off)
Daytime running lamps (engine running).
Automatic illumination of headlamps.
Sidelamps.
Dipped headlamps or main
beam headlamps.
B. Stalk for switching headlamps: pull
the stalk towards you to switch the
lighting between dipped and main beam
headlamps.
In the lamps off and sidelamps modes, the
driver can switch on the main beam headlamps
temporarily ("headlamp flash") by maintaining a
pull on the stalk.
Displays
The lighting is controlled directly by the driver
by means of the ring A and the stalk B.
A. Main lighting mode selection ring: turn it
to position the symbol required facing the
mark.
C. Foglamps selection ring.
The foglamps operate with the sidelamps and
the dipped and main beam headlamps.
Illumination of the corresponding indicator
lamp in the instrument panel confirms that the
lighting selected is on.
138
Visibility
- 1
st
turn forwards: rear foglamps on.
- 1
st
turn rearwards: rear foglamps off.
- 1
st
turn forwards: front foglamps on.
- 2
nd
turn forwards: rear foglamps on.
- 1
st
turn rearwards: rear foglamps off.
- 2
nd
turn rearwards: front foglamps off.
Model with rear foglamps
only
Model with front
and rear foglamps
In good or rainy weather, both day and
night, use of the front foglamps and the
rear foglamps is prohibited. In these
situations, the power of their beams
may dazzle other drivers. They should
only be used in fog or falling snow.
In these weather conditions, it is your
responsibility to switch on the foglamps
and dipped headlamps manually as the
sunshine sensor may detect sufficient
light.
Do not forget to switch off the front and
rear foglamps when they are no longer
needed.
5
139
Visibility
Lighting left on
When a front door is opened with the
ignition off and in manual lighting mode,
an audible signal warns the driver if the
vehicle's lighting is still on.
In this case, switching off the lighting
stops the audible signal.
With the ignition off, if the dipped
headlamps remain on, they will switch
off automatically after thirty minutes to
prevent discharging of the battery.
* Depending on the country of sale.
Daytime-running lamps Manual guide-me-home
lighting
Switching on
F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps
using the lighting stalk.
F A further "headlamp flash" switches the
function off.
Switching off
The manual guide-me-home lighting switches
off automatically after a set time.
System which switches on special lamps at the
front, to make the vehicle more visible by day.
They come on automatically and stay on when
the engine is running, if:
- The function is activated* in the vehicle
parameters menu.
- The lighting control stalk is at position 0
or AUTO.
- The headlamps are off.
You can deactivate the function* via the vehicle
parameters menu.
The temporary illumination of the dipped beam
headlamps after the vehicle's ignition has been
switched off makes the driver's exit easier
when the light is poor.
140
Visibility
Linked with the automatic Guide-
me-home lighting
The link with the automatic illumination of
headlamps provides the guide-me-home
lighting with the following additional options:
- selection of the duration of lighting for 15,
30 or 60 seconds in the vehicle parameters
menu,
- automatic activation of the guide-me-home
lighting when automatic illumination of
headlamps is in operation.
Operating fault
In the event of a fault with the sunshine sensor,
the lighting comes on and a message appears
in the instrument panel screen, accompanied
by an audible signal.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Automatic illumination of headlamps
Activation
F
Turn ring A to the "AUTO" position. The automatic
illumination of headlamps is accompanied by a
message in the instrument panel screen.
Deactivation
F Turn ring A to a position other than
"AUTO". Deactivation is accompanied by a
message in the instrument panel screen.
The sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are
switched on automatically, without any action
on the part of the driver, when a low level of
external light is detected or in certain cases of
activation of the windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient
level or after the windscreen wipers are switched
off, the lamps are switched off automatically.
In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor
may detect sufficient light. Therefore,
the lighting will not come on
automatically.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
linked with the rain sensor and located
in the centre of the windscreen behind
the rear view mirror; the associated
functions would no longer operate.
5
141
Visibility
Manual headlamp
adjustment
To avoid dazzling other road users, the height
of the halogen bulb headlamps must be
adjusted according to the load in the vehicle.
0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.
-. 3 people.
1. 5 people.
-. Intermediate setting.
2. 5 people + maximum authorised loads.
-. Intermediate setting.
3. Driver + maximum authorised loads.
Automatic adjustment of directional
headlamps
The system then places your headlamps in the
lowest position.
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp
comes on in the instrument panel,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message in the instrument
panel screen.
Initial setting is position "0".
To avoid causing a nuisance to other road
users, this system corrects the height of the
xenon headlamp beams automatically and
when stationary, depending on the load in
the vehicle.
Do not touch the xenon bulbs. Contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Travelling abroad
If planning to use your vehicle in a
country that drives on the other side
of the road, we recommend that
you contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop to check whether
the headlamps need to be adjusted to
avoid dazzling on-coming drivers.
142
Visibility
Directional lighting
without cornering lighting
with cornering lighting
"Cornering lighting" function
Activation
This function is activated:
- when the direction indicator is activated,
- from a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel.
Deactivation
This function is deactivated:
- below a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel,
- when stationary or at very low speed,
- when reverse gear is engaged,
- when the directional headlamps are
switched off.
With dipped or main beams, this function
provides additional lighting for the inside of a
bend, when the vehicle speed is below 25 mph
(approx 40 km/h).
This lighting is most useful when travelling at
low and medium speed (urban driving, winding
road, junctions, parking manoeuvres...).
5
143
Visibility
Operating fault
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp
flashes in the instrument panel,
accompanied by a message in the
display screen.
"Directional headlamps"
function
When the dipped or main beam headlamps
are on, this function, associated with the
"Cornering lighting" function, enables the light
beam to follow the direction of the road.
The use of this function, linked with the xenon
headlamps only, considerably improves the
quality of your lighting when cornering.
with directional lighting
without directional lighting
The state of the function remains in the
memory when the ignition is switched off.
When stationary or moving at very low
speed or when reverse gear is engaged,
the function is inactive.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Programming
The function is activated or deactivated via the
vehicle parameters menu.
This function is activated by default.
144
Visibility
Wiper controls
Programming
Various automatic wiper control modes are also
available according to the following options:
- automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers,
- rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.
Manual controls
Fast (heavy rain).
Normal (moderate rain).
Intermittent (proportional to the
speed of the vehicle).
Automatic, then single wipe
(see the corresponding
section).
Off.
Single wipe (press down and
release).
Windscreen wipers
A. Wiping speed selection stalk.
or
The vehicle's front and rear wipers are
designed to improve the driver's visibility
progressively according to the weather
conditions.
The wiper commands are issued directly by the
driver by means of the stalk A and the ring B.
5
145
Visibility
Rear wiper (Tourer)
B. rear wiper selection ring:
park,
intermittent wipe,
wash-wipe (set duration).
Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engaged, the rear
wiper operates if the windscreen wipers are
operating.
Programming
The function is activated or deactivated via the
vehicle parameters menu.
This function is activated by default.
Windscreen and headlamp
wash
F Pull the windscreen wiper stalk towards
you. The windscreen wash then the
windscreen wipers operate for a fixed
period.
The headlamp washers only operate when
the dipped beam headlamps are on.
If a significant accumulation of snow or
ice is present, or when using a tailgate
bicycle carrier, deactivate the automatic
rear wiper via the vehicle parameters
menu.
146
Visibility
Automatic rain sensitive
windscreen wipers
Activation
This is controlled manually by the driver by
moving stalk A to the "AUTO" position.
It is accompanied by a message in the
instrument panel screen.
Switching off
This is controlled manually by the driver by
moving stalk A upwards and returning it to
position "0".
It is accompanied by a message in the
instrument panel screen.
Operating fault
If an automatic wiping malfunction occurs, the
wipers will operate in intermittent mode.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
The windscreen wipers operate automatically,
without any action on the part of the driver, if
rain is detected (sensor behind the rear view
mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of
the rainfall.
Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with
the sunshine sensor and located in the
centre of the windscreen behind the
rear view mirror.
Switch off the automatic wiping when
using an automatic car wash.
In winter, it is advisable to wait until the
windscreen is completely clear of ice
before activating the automatic wiping.
The automatic wiping must be
reactivated if the ignition has been off
for more than one minute, by pushing
stalk A downwards.
5
147
Visibility
Special position of the
windscreen wipers
This position permits release of the windscreen
wiper blades.
It is used for cleaning or replacement of the
blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to
detach the blades from the windscreen.
F Any action on the wiper stalk in the minute
after switching off the ignition places the
blades vertically on the screen.
F To park the blades again, switch on the
ignition and operate the wiper stalk.
To maintain the effectiveness of the flat
wiper blades, it is advisable to:
- handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using soapy
water,
- avoid using them to retain
cardboard on the windscreen,
- replace them at the first signs of
wear.
Safety
148
Direction
indicators
F Left: lower the lighting stalk beyond the
point of resistance.
F Right: raise the lighting stalk beyond the
point of resistance.
Three ashes of the direction
indicators
F Press briefly upwards or downwards,
without going beyond the point of
resistance; the direction indicators will
flash 3 times.
Hazard warning lamps
Visual warning by means of the direction
indicators to alert other road users to a vehicle
breakdown, towing or accident.
Automatic operation of
hazard warning lamps
When braking in an emergency, depending on
the deceleration, the hazard warning lamps
come on automatically.
They switch off automatically the first time you
accelerate.
F You can also switch them off by pressing
the button.
Selection of the left or right direction indicators
to signal a change of direction of the vehicle.
F Press this button, the direction indicators
flash.
They can operate with the ignition off.
6
Safety
149
Horn
Audible warning to alert other road users to
an imminent danger.
F Press the left or right-hand part of the fixed
centred controls steering wheel.
This system allows you to make an emergency
or assistance call to the emergency services or
to the dedicated CITROËN service.
Emergency or
assistance call
For more information on the use of
this function, refer to the "Audio and
telematics" section.
Safety
150
Braking assistance systems
Anti-lock braking system
and electronic brake force
distribution
Linked systems which improve the stability and
manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking,
in particular on poor or slippery surfaces.
Activation
The anti-lock braking system comes into
operation automatically when there is a risk of
wheel lock.
Normal operation of the ABS may make itself
felt by slight vibration of the brake pedal.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message in the instrument
panel screen, it indicates a fault with
the anti-lock braking system which could result
in loss of control of the vehicle when braking.
If this warning lamp comes on,
together with the STOP and ABS
warning lamps, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message in the
instrument panel screen, it indicates a fault with
the electronic brake force distribution which
could result in loss of control of the vehicle
when braking.
You MUST stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
In both cases, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Emergency braking
assistance
System which, in an emergency, enables you
to obtain the optimum braking pressure more
quickly, thus reducing the stopping distance.
Activation
It is triggered by the speed at which the brake
pedal is pressed.
The effect of this is a reduction in the
resistance of the pedal and an increase in
braking efficiency.
Group of supplementary systems which help
you to obtain optimum braking in complete
safety in emergency situations:
- anti-lock braking system (ABS),
- electronic brake force distribution (EBFD),
- emergency braking assistance (EBA).
When replacing wheels (tyres and
rims), ensure that they conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
When braking in an emergency, press
firmly without releasing the pressure.
When braking in an emergency,
press very firmly without releasing
the pressure.
6
Safety
151
Trajectory control systems
Anti-slip regulation (ASR) and dynamic stability
control (DSC)
Activation
This is indicated by flashing of this
warning lamp in the instrument panel.
Your vehicle has a system to improve traction
on snow: intelligent traction control.
This system detects situations of low adhesion
that might make moving off and progress
difficult on deep fresh snow or compacted
snow.
In these situations the intelligent traction
control system regulates the amount of wheel
slip to optimise the traction and trajectory
control of your vehicle.
For vehicles with Hydractive III + suspension,
manual adjustment of ground clearance to
the intermediate position improves further the
ability to make progress in deep snow (see the
relevant paragraph).
The anti-slip regulation (also known as traction
control) optimises traction to prevent skidding
of the wheels, by acting on the brakes of the
driving wheels and on the engine.
The electronic stability control acts on the
brake of one or more wheels and on the engine
to keep the vehicle on the trajectory required
by the driver, within the limits of the laws of
physics.
Intelligent traction control
system ("Snow motion")
These systems are activated automatically
each time the vehicle is started.
They come into operation in the event of a grip
or trajectory problem.
The use of snow tyres is strongly
recommended on surfaces with low
adhesion.
Safety
152
Reactivation
Operating fault
Illumination of this warning lamp and
the lamp in the deactivation button,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message, indicate a fault with
the system.
Deactivation
Reactivate the systems as soon as the level of
grip permits.
F Press this button.
The indicator lamp in the button
comes on.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked.
The DSC and ASR systems no longer act
on the operation of the engine and on the
brakes in the event of a involuntary change of
trajectory.
F Press this button again.
The indicator lamp in the button
goes off.
The systems are reactivated automatically
each time the ignition is switched back on or
from 30 mph (50 km/h).
Below 30 mph (50 km/h), you can reactivate
them manually:
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft
ground...), it may be advisable to deactivate
the DSC and ASR, so that the wheels can turn
freely and regain grip.
6
Safety
153
DSC/ASR
The DSC and ASR systems offer increased
safety in normal driving, but they should not
encourage the driver to take extra risks or
drive at high speed.
It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain,
snow, black ice) that the risk of loss of grip
increases. It is therefore important for your
safety to keep the DSC and ASR systems
activated in all conditions, and particularly
in difficult conditions.
The correct operation of these systems
depends on observation of the
manufacturer's recommendations regarding
as much the wheels (tyres and rims),
braking and electronic components as the
assembly and repair procedures used by
CITROËN dealers.
To benefit in full from the effectiveness
of the DSC and ASR systems in wintry
conditions, the vehicle must be fitted with
four snow tyres, allowing the the vehicle to
retain neutral handling on the road.
After an impact, have these systems
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Safety
154
Seat belts
Front seat belts
Fastening
F Pull the belt down in front of you in a steady
movement, making sure that it does not
become twisted.
F Press the fastening into its buckle.
F Check that it is properly secured and that
the automatic locking mechanism operates
correctly by pulling sharply on the belt
strap.
F The lap strap should be positioned as low
down as possible in the lap and as tight as
possible.
F The diagonal strap should be positioned
across the chest and away from the neck.
Each belt has a reel that adjusts its length
automatically to the girth of the seat occupant.
The front seat belts are fitted with a
pretensioning system and force limiter.
This system improves safety in the front seats
in the event of a front impact.
Depending on the seriousness of the impact,
the pretensioning system instantly tightens the
seat belt against the body of the occupant.
The pretensioning seat belts are active when
the ignition is on.
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the
seat belt against the chest of the occupant,
so increasing his protection.
Height adjustment
When correctly adjusted, the seat belt shoulder
strap falls over the middle of the shoulder.
F To adjust the belt, squeeze the control and
slide it in the direction required.
Unfastening
F To unfasten the belt, press on the red
button in the buckle.
The belt retracts automatically when not in use.
6
Safety
155
Rear seat belts
Fastening
F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the
buckle.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening
F Press the red button on the buckle.
Each rear seat is fitted with a three-point inertia
reel seat belt with force limiter.
This display screen is located in the roof
console.
The seat belt fastened/unfastened status
for each seating position is indicated by the
lighting or flashing of the warning lamps linked
to each position.
A. Front and/or rear seat belts not fastened/
unfastened warning lamp.
B. Front left-hand seat belt warning lamp.
C. Front right-hand seat belt warning lamp.
D. Rear right-hand seat belt warning lamp.
E. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp.
F. Rear left-hand seat belt warning lamp.
G. Front passenger's airbag deactivation
warning lamp.
H. Passenger's front airbag activation warning
lamp.
Seat belts and passenger's
front airbag warning lamp
display screen
Safety
156
Advice
In order to be effective, a seat belt must:
- be tightened as close to the body as
possible,
- be pulled in front of you with a smooth
movement, checking that it does not
twist,
- be used to restrain only one person,
- not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,
- not be converted or modified to avoid
affecting its performance.
Recommendations
for children
Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is
less than 12 years old or shorter than one
and a half metres.
Never use the same seat belt to secure more
than one person.
Never allow a child to travel on your lap.
For more information, refer to the "Child
seats" section.
In accordance with current safety
regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle's
seat belts, go to a qualified workshop with
the skills and equipment needed, which a
CITROËN dealer is able to provide.
Have your seat belts checked regularly by
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop,
particularly if the straps show signs of
damage.
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy
water or a textile cleaning product, sold by
CITROËN dealers.
After folding or moving a seat or rear bench
seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned
and reeled in correctly.
In the event of an impact
Depending on the nature and seriousness
of the impact, the pretensioning device may
be deployed before and independently of the
airbags. Deployment of the pretensioners
is accompanied by a slight discharge of
harmless smoke and a noise, due to the
activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
incorporated in the system.
In all cases, the airbag warning lamp
comes on.
Following an impact, have the seat belts
system checked, and if necessary replaced,
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The driver must ensure that passengers use
the seat belts correctly and that they are all
restrained securely before setting off.
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle,
always fasten your seat belt, even for short
journeys.
Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as
they will not fulfil their role fully.
The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel
permitting automatic adjustment of the length
of the strap to your size. The seat belt is
stowed automatically when not in use.
Before and after use, ensure that the seat
belt is reeled in correctly.
The lower part of the strap must be
positioned as low as possible on the pelvis.
The upper part must be positioned in the
hollow of the shoulder.
The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic
locking device which comes into operation in
the event of a collision, emergency braking
or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release
the device by pulling the strap firmly and
then releasing it so that it reels in slightly.
6
Safety
157
Airbags
System designed to contribute towards
improving the safety of the occupants
(with the exception of the rear centre
passenger) in the event of a violent collision.
The airbags supplement the action of the
force-limiting seat belts.
If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors
record and analyse the front and side impacts
sustained in the impact detection zones:
- in the case of a serious impact, the airbags
are deployed instantly and contribute
towards best protecting the occupants of
the vehicle (with the exception of the rear
centre passenger); immediately after the
impact, the airbags deflate rapidly so that
they do not hinder visibility or the exit of the
occupants,
- in the case of a minor or rear impact or in
certain roll-over conditions, the airbags
may not be deployed; the seat belt alone
contributes towards your protection in
these situations.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
The airbags do not operate when
the ignition is switched off.
This equipment will only deploy once.
If a second impact occurs (during
the same or a subsequent accident),
the deployment of airbag will not be
triggered again.
Deployment of one or more airbags
is accompanied by a slight emission
of smoke and a noise, due to the
activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
incorporated in the system.
This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive
individuals may experience slight
irritation.
The noise of the detonation related to
the deployment of one or more airbags
may result in a slight loss of hearing for
a short time.
Safety
158
Front airbags
Deployment
The airbags are deployed, except the
passenger's front airbag if it is deactivated, in the
event of a serious front impact to all or part of the
front impact zone A, in the longitudinal centreline
of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed
from the front to the rear of the vehicle.
The front airbag inflates between the chest and
head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the
steering wheel, drivers side, and the dashboard,
passenger's side to cushion their forward
movement.
This warning lamp comes on in the
screen located in the roof console
when the ignition is on and until the
airbag is reactivated.
Deactivation
Only the front passenger's airbag can be
deactivated:
F with the ignition off, insert the key in the
passenger airbag deactivation switch 1,
F turn it to the "OFF" position,
F then, remove the key keeping the switch in
this position.
To assure the safety of your child, the
passenger's airbag must be deactivated
when you install a rearward facing child
seat on the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag
were deployed.
Reactivation
When you remove a rearward facing child seat,
turn switch 1 to the "ON" position to reactivate
the airbag and so assure the safety of your
front passenger in the event of an impact.
System which contributes towards the
protection of the head and chest of the driver
and front passenger in the event of a front
impact.
The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the
steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is
fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.
6
Safety
159
Lateral airbags*
Deployment
It is deployed unilaterally in the event of a
serious side impact applied to all or part of
the side impact zone B, perpendicular to the
longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a
horizontal plane and directed from the outside
towards the inside of the vehicle.
The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and
shoulder of the front occupant of the vehicle
and the corresponding door trim panel.
Operating fault
System which contributes towards the
protection of the driver and front passenger in
the event of a serious side impact, in order to
limit the risk of injury to the chest, between the
hip and shoulder.
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the front seat
backrest frame, on the outer side.
If this symbol appears in the
instrument panel screen,
accompanied by an audible warning
and a message, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop without
delay to have the system checked. The
airbags may no longer be deployed in
the event of a serious impact.
If the symbol or warning lamp comes on
continuously, do not install a child seat
or an adult on the front passenger seat.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
If this warning lamp flashes, contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop without delay.
* Depending on the country of sale.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
Safety
160
Operating fault
If this symbol is displayed in
the instrument panel screen,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop to
have the system checked. The
airbags may no longer be deployed in
the event of a serious impact.
In the event of a minor impact or bump
on the side of the vehicle or if the
vehicle rolls over, the airbags may not
be deployed.
No lateral airbag is deployed in the
event of a rear or front collision.
Curtain airbags*
System which contributes towards the
protection of the the driver and passengers
(with the exception of the rear centre
passenger) in the event of a serious side
impact, in order to limit the risk of injury to the
side of the head.
Each curtain airbag is fitted in the pillars and
the upper part of the passenger compartment.
Deployment
It is deployed at the same time as the
corresponding lateral airbag in the event of a
serious side impact to all or part of the side
impact zone B, perpendicular to the longitudinal
centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane
and directed from the outside towards the
inside of the vehicle.
The curtain airbag inflates between the front or
rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.
* Depending on the country of sale.
6
Safety
161
For the airbags to be fully effective, observe the safety recommendations below:
Front airbags
Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its spokes or resting your hands on the centre part
of the wheel.
Passengers must not place their feet on the dashboard.
Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags can cause burns or the risk of injury from a
cigarette or pipe.
Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or hit it violently.
Do not fit or attach anything to the steering wheel or dashboard, this could cause injuries with
deployment of the airbags.
Lateral airbags
Use only approved covers on the seats, compatible with the deployment the lateral airbags.
For information on the range of seat covers suitable for your vehicle, you can contact a
CITROËN dealer.
Refer to the "Accessories" section.
Do not fix or attach anything to the seat backs (clothing...). This could cause injury to the chest
or arms if the lateral airbag is deployed.
Do not sit with the upper part of the body any nearer to the door than necessary.
Curtain airbags
Do not fix or attach anything to the roof. This could cause injury to the head if the curtain
airbag is deployed.
If fitted on your vehicle, do not remove the grab handles installed on the roof, they play a part
in securing the curtain airbags.
Advice
Sit in a normal upright position.
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.
Do not leave anything between the
occupants and the airbags (a child, pet,
object...), nor fix or attach anything close to
the inflation trajectory of the airbags; this
could cause injuries during their deployment.
Never modify the original definition of your
vehicle, particularly in the area directly
around the airbags.
After an accident or if the vehicle has been
stolen or broken into, have the airbag
systems checked.
All work on the airbag system must be
carried out by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Even if all of the precautions mentioned
are observed, a risk of injury or of minor
burns to the head, chest or arms when an
airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The
bag inflates almost instantly (within a few
milliseconds) then deflates within the same
time discharging the hot gas via openings
provided for this purpose.
Child safety
162
Although one of CITROËN main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children
also depends on you.
General points relating to child seats
For maximum safety, please observe the
following recommendations:
* The regulations on carrying children are
specific to each country. Refer to the
legislation in force in your country.
CITROËN recommends that children
should travel on the rear seats of your
vehicle:
- rearward facing up to the age of 3,
- forward facing over the age of 3.
- in accordance with European regulations,
all children under the age of 12 or less
than one and a half metres tall must
travel in approved child seats suited to
their weight, on seats fitted with a seat
belt or ISOFIX mountings*,
- statistically, the safest seats in your
vehicle for carrying children are the
rear seats,
- a child weighing less than 9 kg must
travel in the rearward facing position
both in the front and in the rear.
7
Child safety
163
Child seat at the rear
Rearward facing
When a rearward facing child seat is installed
on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's
front seat forward and straighten the backrest
so that the rearward facing child seat does not
touch the vehicle's front seat.
Forward facing
When a forward facing child seat is installed
on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's
front seat forward and straighten the backrest
so that the legs of the child in the forward
facing child seat do not touch the vehicle's front
seat.
Centre rear seat
A child seat with a support leg must never be
installed on the centre rear passenger seat.
Ensure that the seat belt is correctly
tensioned.
For child seats with a support leg,
ensure that this is in firm contact with
the floor. If necessary, adjust the front
seat of the vehicle.
The incorrect installation of a child seat
in a vehicle compromises the protection
of the child in the event of an accident.
Child safety
164
Rearward facing Forward facing
Child seat in the front*
Ensure that the seat belt is correctly
tensioned.
For child seats with a support leg,
ensure that the support leg is in stable
contact with the floor. If necessary,
adjust the passenger seat.
* Refer to the current legislation in your country
before installing a child seat on this seat.
When a rearward facing child seat is installed
on the front passenger seat, adjust the seat
to the intermediate longitudinal and highest
position, with the backrest straightened.
The passenger's front airbag must be
deactivated. Otherwise, the child risks being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag were
to inflate.
When a forward facing child seat is installed
on the front passenger seat, adjust the
vehicle's seat to the intermediate longitudinal
and highest position with seat backrest
straightened and leave the passenger's front
airbag activated.
Passenger seat adjusted to the intermediate
longitudinal and highest position.
7
Child safety
165
Passenger airbag OFF
The warning label present on both sides of the
passenger's sun visor repeats this advice. In
line with current legislation, the following tables
contain this warning in all of the languages
required.
Never install a rearward facing child
restraint system on a seat protected by
an active front airbag. This could cause
the death of the child or serious injury.
For information on deactivating the
passenger's front airbag, refer to the
"Airbags" section.
Deactivating the passenger's front airbag
This label is located on the middle door pillar,
passenger side.
AR
BG
НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА. Това може да причини
СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето.
CS
NIKDY neumisťujte dětské zádržné zařízení orientované směrem dozadu na sedadlo chráněné AKTIVOVANÝM čelním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí
nebezpí SMRTI DÍTĚTE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRANÍ.
DA
Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde, der er beskyttet af en AKTIV AIRBAG. BARNET risikerer at blive ALVORLIGT
KVÆSTET eller DRÆBT.
DE
Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIERTEM Front-Airbag NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der Fahrtrichtung,
das Kind könnte schwere oder sogar tödliche Verletzungen erleiden.
EL
Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου, σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από
ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ. Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ
EN
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur
ES
NO INSTALAR NUNCA un sistema de retención para niños de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un
AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO, ya que podría causar lesiones GRAVES o incluso la MUERTE del niño.
ET
Ärge MITTE KUNAGI paigaldage "seljaga sõidusuunas" lapseistet juhi kõrvalistmele, mille ESITURVAPADI on AKTIVEERITUD. Turvapadja
avanemine võib last TÕSISELT või ELUOHTLIKULT vigastada.
FI
ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen
laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.
FR
NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l’arrre sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE
frontal ACTI.
Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l’ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT
HR
NIKADA ne postavljati djju sjedalicu leđima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zaštićeno UKLJENIM prednjim ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM. To bi
moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
HU
SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést AKTIVÁLT (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen. Ez a
gyermek HALÁLÁT vagy SÚLYOS SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.
IT
NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale
ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.
LT
NIEKADA neįrenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemos su atgal atgžtu vaiku ant sėdys, kuri saugoma VEIKIAIOS priekinės ORO
PAGALVĖS. Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali būti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.
LV
NEKAD NEuzstādiet uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdekti priekšējā pasiera sēdvietā, kurā ir AKTIVITS priekšējais DROŠĪBAS GAISA
SPILVENS.
Tas var izraisīt BĒRNA NĀVI vai radīt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
Child safety
166
7
MT
Qatt m’ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f’siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista’ tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla
NL
Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de
airbag kan het KIND LEVENSGEVAARLIJK GEWOND RAKEN
NO
Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE,
BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET.
PL
NIGDY nie instalować fotelika dzieccego w pozycji "tyłem do kierunku jazdy" na siedzeniu wyposonym w CZOŁOWĄ PODUSZ
POWIETRZNĄ w stanie AKTYWNYM. Może to doprowadzić do ŚMIERCI DZIECKA lub spowodować u niego POWAŻNE OBRAŻENIA
CIAŁA.
PT
NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO.
Esta instalão poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA.
RO
Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG
frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA.
RU
ВО ВСЕХ СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье,
защищенном ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ, установленной перед этим сиденьем.
Это может привести к ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ
SK
NIKDY neinštalujte detské zádržné zariadenie orientované smerom dozadu na sedadlo chránené AKTIVOVANÝM čelným AIRBAGOM.
Mohlo by dôjsť k SMRTEĽNÉMU alebo VÁŽNEMU PORANENIU DIEŤAŤA.
SL
NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega seda s hrbtom v smeri vožnje, če je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedežem
AKTIVIRANA. Takšna namestitev lahko povzroči SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE.
SR
NIKADA ne koristite dje sedište koje se okreće unazad na sedtu zaštenim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer
mogu nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA.
SV
Passagerarkrockkudden fram MÅSTE vara avaktiverad om en bakåtvänd bilbarnstol installeras på denna plats. Annars riskerar barnet att
DAS eller SKADAS ALLVARLIGT.
TR
KESİNLKLE HAVA YASTIĞI AKTİF olan ön koltuğa yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuğu yerleştirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUĞUN ÖLMESİNE veya
ÇOK AĞIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.
Child safety
167
Child safety
168
Child seats recommended by CITROËN
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
L1
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"
Installed in the rearward facing position.
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L4
"KLIPPAN Optima"
From 22 kg (approximately 6 years), the booster is used on its own.
L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
CITROËN offers a range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt.
7
Child safety
169
Installing child seats secured using
the seat belt
Seat position(s)
Weight and indicative age of child
Up to 13 kg
(Groups 0 (b) and 0+)
Up to approx. 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg
(Group 1)
From approx. 1 to 3 years
From 15 to 25 kg
(Group 2)
From approx. 3 to 6 years
From 22 to 36 kg
(Group 3)
From approx. 6 to
10 years
Row 1
Front passenger (c) with
height adjustment (e)
U (R) U (R) U (R) U (R)
Front passenger (c) without
height adjustment (e)
U U U U
Row 2
Outer rear (d) U U U U
Centre rear (d) (f) U U U U
In conformity with European law, this table shows you the possibilities for the installation of universally approved child seats (a) using a seat belt,
depending on the weight of the child and the seating position in the vehicle.
U: Seat position suitable for installation of universally approved rearward facing and/or forward facing child seat.
U (R): As U, with the vehicle seat, which must be adjusted to the highest and intermediate longitudinal position.
Child safety
170
(a) Universal child seat: child seat which can
be installed in all vehicles using the seat
belt.
(b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Shells and
"car cots" cannot be installed on the front
passenger seat.
(c) Consult the current legislation for your
country before driving with your child in this
seat.
(d) To install a child seat on a rear seat,
rearward facing or forward facing, move
the front seat forward, then straighten the
backrest to allow enough space for the
child seat and the child's legs.
Remove and stow the head restraint
before installing a child seat with a
backrest on a passenger seat. Refit the
head restraint once the child seat has
been removed.
(e) When a rearward facing child seat is
installed on the front passenger seat, the
passenger airbag must be deactivated.
Otherwise the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the
airbag were deployed. When a forward
facing child seat is installed on the front
passenger seat, the passenger airbag
must remain active.
(f) A child seat with a support leg must never
be installed on the centre rear seat.
7
Child safety
171
Advice
Children at the front
The legislation on carrying children on the
front passenger seat is specific to each
country. Refer to the legislation in force in
your country.
Deactivate the passenger's front airbag
when a rearward facing child seat is installed
on the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the child risks being seriously
injured or killed if the airbag is deployed.
Installing a booster seat
The chest part of the seat belt must be
positioned on the child's shoulder without
touching the neck.
Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
passes correctly over the child's thighs.
CITROËN recommends the use of a booster
seat which has a back, fitted with a seat belt
guide at shoulder level.
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a
vehicle compromises the child's protection in
the event of an accident.
Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt
buckle under the child seat, as this could
destabilise it.
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the
child seat harnesses keeping the slack
relative to the child's body to a minimum,
even for short journeys.
When installing a child seat using the seat
belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened
correctly on the child seat and that it secures
the child seat firmly on the seat of your
vehicle. If your passenger seat is adjustable,
move it forwards if necessary.
At rear seating positions, always leave
sufficient space between the front seat and:
- a rearward facing child seat,
- the child's feet for a child seat fitted
forward facing.
To do this, move the front seat forwards
and, if necessary, move its backrest into the
upright position.
For optimum installation of the forward facing
child seat, ensure that the back of the child
seat is as close as possible to the backrest
of the vehicle's seat, in contact if possible.
You mst remove the head restraint before
installing a child seat with backrest to a
passenger seat.
Ensure that the head restraint is stored or
attached securely to prevent it from being
thrown around the vehicle in the event of
sharp braking. Refit the head restraint when
the child seat is removed.
As a safety precaution, do not leave:
- a child or children alone and
unsupervised in a vehicle,
- a child or an animal in a vehicle which
is exposed to the sun, with the windows
closed,
- the keys within reach of children inside
the vehicle.
To prevent accidental opening of the doors
and rear windows, use the child lock.
Take care not to open the rear windows by
more than one third.
To protect young children from the rays of
the sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.
Child safety
172
"ISOFIX" mountings
Your vehicle has been approved in accordance
with the latest ISOFIX regulations.
The outer rear seats are fitted with regulation
ISOFIX mountings.
There are three rings for each outer rear seat:
- two lower rings A, located between the
vehicle seat back and cushion, indicated by
a marking,
- an upper ring B, called the TOP
TETHER, fixed to the rear shelf and
located under a cover behind the head
restraint behind the head restraint, for
fixing the upper strap.
It is indicated by a marking.
There are three rings for each outer rear seat:
- two lower rings A, located between the
vehicle seat back and cushion, indicated by
a marking,
- an upper ring C, called the TOP TETHER,
fixed to the roof on the boot end and
located under a cover, for fixing the upper
strap.
It is indicated by a marking.
Saloon Tourer
7
Child safety
173
To attach the child seat to the TOP TETHER:
- remove and stow the head restraint before
installing a child seat on this seat (refit it
once the child seat has been removed),
- pass the strap of the child seat centrally
between the head restraint rod apertures,
- raise the TOP TETHER cover, located on
the rear shelf (Saloon) or the roof (Tourer),
- secure the upper strap fixing to the ring B
or C,
- tighten the upper strap.
The TOP TETHER is used to secure the
upper strap of child seats that have one. This
arrangement limits the forward tipping of the
child seat in the event of a front impact.
The incorrect installation of a child seat
in a vehicle compromises the child's
protection in the event of an accident.
Observe strictly the fitting instructions
provided with the child seat.
This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast,
reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in
your vehicle.
The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with
two latches which are secured easily on the
two rings A, following installation of the guides
(supplied with the seat).
Some also have an upper strap which is
attached to the ring B or C.
For information on the possibilities for
installing ISOFIX child seats in your
vehicle, refer to the summary table.
Child safety
174
ISOFIX child seat recommended by CITROËN and type
approved for your vehicle
RÖMER BabySafe Plus ISOFIX (size category E)
Group 0+: up to 13 kg
Installed in the rearward facing position using an ISOFIX base which is attached to the rings A.
The base has a support leg, adjustable for height, that must be in contact with the floor of the vehicle.
This child seat can also be secured using a seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used and is
attached to the vehicle seat using the three-point sea belt.
RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX (size category B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installed in the forward facing position.
Fitted with an upper strap to be secured to the upper ring B or C,
referred to as the TOP TETHER.
Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.
This child seat can also be used on seats which are not fitted with ISOFIX mountings.
In this case, it must be attached to the vehicle seat using the three-point seat belt.
Follow the instructions for fitting the child seat given in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.
7
Child safety
175
Positions for tting ISOFIX child
seats
IUF: Seat position suitable for installation of an Isofix Universal "Forward facing" seat attached
using the top tether.
IL-SU: Seat position suitable for installation of an ISOFIX Semi-Universal child seat, either:
- rearward facing fitted with an upper strap or a support leg
- forward facing fitted with a support leg,
- a shell fitted with an upper strap or a support leg.
To attach the upper strap, refer to the "ISOFIX mountings" section.
Weight of child/Age given as a guide
Up to 10 kg
(group 0)
Up to approx.
6 months
Up to 10 kg
(group 0)
Up to 13 kg
(group 0+)
Up to approx. 1 year
9 to 18 kg (group 1)
Approx. 1 to 3 years
Type of ISOFIX child seat Shell rearward facing rearward facing forward facing
ISOFIX size class F G C D E C D A B B1
ISOFIX universal and semi-universal
child seats can be installed on the outer
rear seats
IL-SU* IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU
* The ISOFIX shell, fixed to the lower rings of an ISOFIX seat, occupies two rear seats.
In conformity with European law, this table shows you the possibilities for the installation of ISOFIX child seats to seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX
mounting points.
For ISOFIX universal and semi-universal child seats, the ISOFIX size class, defined by a letter from A to G, is shown on the child seat to the right of the
ISOFIX logo.
Remove and stow the head restraint
before installing a child seat with a
backrest on a passenger seat. Refit the
head restraint once the child seat has
been removed.
Child safety
176
Electric child lock
Activation
F Press button A.
The indicator lamp in button A comes on,
accompanied by a message in the instrument
panel screen.
Remote control system to prevent opening of the rear doors using their interior controls and use of
the rear electric windows.
The control is located on the driver's door, with the electric window controls.
Deactivation
F Press button A again.
The indicator lamp in button A goes off,
accompanied by a message in the instrument
panel screen.
This indicator lamp remains off until the child
lock is activated.
This system is independent and in no
circumstances does it take the place of
the central locking control.
Check the status of the child lock each
time you switch on the ignition.
Always remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even for a
short time.
In the event of a serious impact,
the electric child lock is deactivated
automatically to permit the exit of the
rear passengers.
Any other status of the indicator lamp
indicates a fault with the electric child
lock. Have it checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
8
Practical information
177
Fuel tank
Capacity of the tank: approximately 71 litres*.
Low fuel level
When the low fuel level in the
tank is reached, this warning
lamp comes on in the instrument
panel, accompanied by an
audible warning and a message in the display
screen. When it first comes on, there remains
around 5 litres of fuel in the tank.
You must refuel to avoid running out of fuel.
F Press at the top left corner, then pull on its
edge.
While you are refuelling, the engine must be
stopped and the ignition switched off.
F Turn the key a quarter turn to lock and
unlock the filler cap.
F When refuelling, place the cap on hook A.
F Fill the tank, but do not persist after the
third cut-off; this could cause your vehicle
to malfunction.
For a petrol engine with a catalytic
converter, the use of unleaded fuel is
compulsory.
The filler neck is narrower to ensure that only
unleaded petrol nozzles can be put in.
Opening the fuel flap
Refuelling
Additions of fuel must be of at least
5 litres to be taken into account by the
fuel gauge.
Opening the filler cap may create a
noise of an inrush of air. This vacuum,
which is entirely normal, is caused by
the sealing of the fuel system.
With Stop & Start, never refuel with the
system in STOP mode; you must switch
off the ignition with the key.
* 55 litres for Slovakia.
Practical information
178
Misfuel prevention (Diesel)*
When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the
fuel filler neck of your Diesel vehicle, it comes
into contact with the flap. The system remains
closed and prevents filling.
Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type
filler nozzle.
Mechanical device which prevents filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of
engine damage that can result from filling with the wrong fuel.
Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention device appears when the filler cap is removed.
Operation
It remains possible to use a fuel can to
fill the tank.
In order to ensure a good flow of fuel,
do not place the nozzle of the fuel can
in direct contact with the flap of the
misfuel prevention device and pour
slowly.
* Depending on the country of sale.
8
Practical information
179
Fuel used for petrol engines
The petrol engines are compatible with
E10 bio-petrol (containing 10 % ethanol),
conforming to European standards EN 228
and EN 15376.
E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % ethanol)
are reserved exclusively for vehicles marketed
for the use of this type of fuel (BioFlex
vehicles). The quality of the ethanol must
comply with European standard EN 15293.
Fuel used for Diesel
engines
The Diesel engines are compatible with
biofuels which conform to current and future
European standards (Diesel fuel which
complies with standard EN 590 mixed with
a biofuel which complies with standard
EN 14214) available at the pumps (containing
up to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
B30 biofuel can be used in certain Diesel
engines. However, this use, even occasional,
requires strict application of the special
servicing conditions. Contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
The use of any other type of (bio)fuel
(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted,
domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of
damage to the engine and fuel system).
Travelling abroad
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may
be different in other countries, the
presence of the misfuel prevention
device may make refuelling impossible.
Not all Diesel vehicles are fitted with
misfuel protection, so before travelling
abroad, we recommend that you check
with the CITROËN dealer network,
whether your vehicle is suitable for the
fuel pumps in the country in which you
want to travel.
Practical information
180
HDi engines make use of advanced
technology.
For any work on your vehicle, contact
a qualified workshop that has the
skills and equipment required, which a
CITROËN dealer is able to provide.
BlueHDi engines
Running out of fuel (Diesel)
Priming the fuel system
HDi 160 engine
If you run out of fuel:
F after filling (minimum 5 litres) and removing
the protective cover to gain access to the
priming pump,
F operate the manual priming pump, until
some resistance is felt,
F operate the starter motor while depressing
the accelerator pedal slightly until the
engine starts.
If the engine fails to start at the first attempt,
wait fifteen seconds before trying again.
If the engine fails to start after a few attempts,
operate the priming pump again and then try to
start the engine.
When the engine is idling, accelerate slightly to
complete the bleeding of the circuit.
F Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of
Diesel.
F Switch on the ignition (without starting the
engine).
F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the
ignition.
F Repeat the operation 10 times.
F Operate the starter to run the engine.
8
Practical information
181
Temporary puncture repair kit
The kit is located in the boot under the floor.Complete system consisting of a compressor
and a sealant cartridge which permits the
temporary repair of the tyre so that you can
drive to the nearest garage.
This repair kit is available from
CITROËN dealers or a qualified
workshop.
It is designed to repair holes of a
maximum diameter of 6 mm, located
exclusively on the tyre tread or
shoulder. Avoid removing any foreign
bodies which have penetrated the tyre.
The vehicle's electric system allows the
connection of a compressor for long
enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture
repair or for inflating a small inflatable
accessory.
All versions*, except BlueHDi
Diesel
BlueHDi Diesel versions
* Depending on the country of sale.
Practical information
182
Using the kit
F Switch off the ignition.
F Affix the speed limitation sticker to the
vehicle's steering wheel to remind you that
a wheel is in temporary use.
F Check that the switch A is in position "0".
F Connect the pipe of the cartridge 1 to the
valve of the tyre to be repaired.
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Start the vehicle and leave the engine
running.
8
Practical information
183
F Remove the compressor and unclip and
store the cartridge in a sealed bag to avoid
staining your vehicle with traces of fluid.
F Drive immediately for approximately
two miles (three kilometres), at reduced
speed (between 15 and 35 mph [20 and
60 km/h]), to plug the puncture.
F Stop to check the repair and the pressure.
F Connect the compressor pipe directly to
the valve of the repaired wheel.
F Switch on the compressor by moving
the switch A to position "1" until the tyre
pressure reaches 2.0 bars.
If this pressure has not been reached
after approximately five to ten minutes,
the tyre cannot be repaired; contact a
CITROËN dealer to have your vehicle
repaired.
Practical information
184
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket again.
F Start the vehicle again and leave the
engine running.
F Adjust the pressure using the compressor
(to inflate: switch A in position "1";
to deflate: switch A in position "0" and
press button B), in accordance with the
vehicle's tyre pressure label (located on
the door aperture on the left-hand side),
then remember to check that the leak has
been plugged correctly (no further loss of
pressure after several miles [kilometres]).
F Remove the compressor, then store the
whole kit.
F Drive at reduced speed (50 mph
[80 km/h] max) limiting the distance
travelled to approximately 120 miles
(200 km).
F Visit a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible to have the
tyre repaired or replaced by a technician.
Take care as sealant cartridge contains
ethylene-glycol. This product is harmful
if swallowed and causes irritation to the
eyes. Keep it out of reach of children.
The expiry date of the sealant is
indicated on the base of the cartridge.
The cartridge is designed for a single
use; even if only partly used, it must be
replaced.
After use, do not discard the cartridge
into the environment, take it to a
CITROËN dealer or an authorised
waste disposal site.
Do not forget to obtain a new cartridge,
available from CITROËN dealers or a
qualified workshop.
If the vehicle is fitted with tyre under-
inflation detection, the tyre under-
inflation warning lamp will remain on
after the wheel has been repaired until
the system is reinitialised by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
8
Practical information
185
Changing a wheel
Access to the tools
For vehicles supplied with a standard spare
wheel (same size as the four wheels), the tools
are stowed in a carrier, located in the spare
wheel.
F Release the retaining strap for access to it.
List of tools
All of these tools are specific to your vehicle
and may vary according to equipment. Do not
use them for any other purpose.
1. Wheelbrace.
Used for removing the wheel trim and the
wheel fixing bolts.
2. Jack with integral handle.
Used to raise the vehicle.
3. Bolt head finisher tool.
Used to remove the wheel bolt protectors
(finishers) on wheel bolts with alloy wheels.
4. Wheel chock*.
5. Towing eye.
Do not use:
- the jack for any purpose other than
lifting the vehicle,
- a different jack from the one
supplied with the vehicle.
If the vehicle does not have its original
jack, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop to obtain the one
listed by the manufacturer.
For more information, refer to the
"Towing the vehicle" section.
* Depending on country of sale.
For vehicles supplied with a "space-saver"
type spare wheel, the tools are stowed in a
storage well, located below the spare wheel.
F Unscrew the central yellow screw and
remove the wheel for access to it.
Practical information
186
Access to the spare wheel
Removing the boot oor
F Saloon: raise the boot floor and fold in two.
F Tourer: raise the boot floor and hook it
using the retractable handle. Secure the
hook to the top part of the boot.
Removing the standard spare
wheel
F Detach the strap then push the wheel
forwards so as to be able to lift it.
Repositioning the standard spare
wheel
F Position the spare wheel flat in the boot,
then pull it towards you.
F Next place the toolbox inside the wheel,
then secure the assembly using the strap.
Removing the "space-saver"
spare wheel
F Unscrew the central yellow screw.
F Take the spare wheel from the rear and lift
it towards you.
F Remove the wheel from the boot.
8
Practical information
187
The tyre pressures are indicated on the
label located on the left hand centre
door pillar.
Tyre pressures are given on this label
for different vehicle loading conditions.
Repositioning the "space-saver"
spare wheel
F Return the spare wheel to its housing
above the toolbox.
F Unscrew the central yellow screw by a few
turns, then put it in place in the middle of
the wheel.
F Tighten the central yellow screw until it
clicks so that it is secured in its housing.
Repositioning the boot oor
F Release the boot floor to return it to its
initial position.
Practical information
188
Removing a wheel
F Park the vehicle on stable, firm ground that
is not slippery. apply the parking brake.
F If your vehicle is equipped with
"Hydractive III+" suspension, with the
engine running at idle, adjust the ground
clearance to its maximum height.
F Switch off the ignition and engage first gear
(position P for an automatic gearbox).
F If your vehicle is fitted with "Hydractive III+"
suspension, position the chock, whichever
direction the gradient may be in, in front of
the front wheel diametrically opposite to
the one to be replaced.
List of operations
F Remove the protector from each bolt using
tool 3.
F Fit the security bolt socket to the
wheelbrace to slacken the security bolt
(depending on equipment).
F Slacken the other bolts using just the
wheelbrace 1.
Before positioning the jack:
F Always adjust the vehicle’s ground
clearance to the "maximum height"
position and retain this adjustment
for as long as the jack is under the
vehicle (do not use the hydraulic
adjustments),
F Ensure that any passengers have
left the vehicle and are in a safe
place.
Never go underneath the vehicle if it is
supported only by the jack.
The jack and all of the tools are specific
to your vehicle. Do not use them for any
other purposes.
Have the original wheel repaired and
refitted as soon as possible.
8
Practical information
189
F Position the foot of the jack 2 on the
ground, ensuring that it is directly below the
front A or rear B jacking point provided on
the underbody, closest to the wheel to be
changed.
Ensure that the jack is stable. If the
ground is slippery or loose, the jack
may slip or drop - Risk of injury!
Ensure that the jack is positioned only
at one of the jacking points provided
under the vehicle, making sure that the
vehicle's contact area is centred on the
head of the jack. Otherwise there is a
risk of damage to the vehicle and/or of
the jack dropping - Risk of injury!
F Extend the jack 2 until its head comes into
contact with the jacking point A or B used;
the contact area A or B on the vehicle must
be correctly inserted into the central part of
the head of the jack.
F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient
space between the wheel and the ground
to easily fit the spare (non punctured) spare
wheel.
F Remove the bolts and stow them in a clean
place.
F Remove the wheel.
Practical information
190
List of operations
Fitting a wheelWheel for temporary use
Your vehicle may be fitted with a spare wheel
which is different to those on the vehicle. When
fitting the spare wheel, it is normal to notice
that the wheel bolt washers do not come into
contact with the wheel rim. The spare wheel is
secured by the conical tapering of the wheel
bolt’s shaft.
When refitting the original wheel, ensure that
the wheel bolt contact surfaces are clean and
in good condition.
F Lower the vehicle to the ground.
F Lower the jack 2 and remove it.
F Fit the wheel on the hub.
F Fit and tighten the bolts by hand.
F Pre-tighten the security bolt using
wheelbrace 1 and security bolt socket
(depending on equipment).
F Pre-tighten the other bolts using just the
wheelbrace 1.
8
Practical information
191
If your vehicle is fitted with a spare
wheel of a different size to those on the
vehicle, you must not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h) whilst using the spare wheel.
The wheel bolts are specific to the type
of wheel.
If the type of wheel is changed,
check with your CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop that the wheel bolts
are compatible with the new wheels.
Take care to note down the code
number engraved on the head of the
security bolt socket. This will enable
you to obtain a replacement security
bolt socket from your dealer.
F Tighten the security bolt using
wheelbrace 1 and security bolt socket
(depending on equipment).
F Tighten the other bolts using just the
wheelbrace 1.
F Refit the protectors on the bolts.
F Stow the tools in the carrier box.
F Return the suspension to the normal
position.
F Check that the tyre pressure is correct and
have the balancing checked.
Tyre under-ination detection
The space-saver type or steel spare
wheel does not have a sensor.
The punctured wheel must be repaired
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Practical information
192
Snow chains
In wintry conditions, snow chains improve traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle when
braking.
The snow chains must be fitted only
to the front wheels. They must never
be fitted to "space-saver" type spare
wheels.
Take account of the legislation in force
in your country on the use of snow
chains and the maximum running speed
authorised.
Avoid driving with snow chains on roads
that have been cleared of snow, to
avoid damaging your vehicle's tyres and
the road surface. If your vehicle is fitted
with alloy wheels, check that no part of
the chain or its fixings is in contact with
the wheel rim.
Advice on installation
F If you have to fit the chains during a
journey, stop the vehicle on a flat surface
on the side of the road.
F Apply the parking brake and position any
wheel chocks to prevent movement of your
vehicle.
F Fit the chains following the instructions
provided by the manufacturer.
F Move off gently and drive for a few
moments, without exceeding 30 mph
(50 km/h).
F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow
chains are correctly tightened.
Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the
type of wheel fitted to your vehicle:
Original tyre size Chain specification
225/60 V16
Maximum link size:
9 mm
225/55 W17
245/45 W18
These tyres cannot
be fitted with chains
245/40 Y19
For more information on snow chains, contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
It is strongly recommended that before
you leave, you practise fitting the snow
chains on a level and dry surface.
8
Practical information
193
Changing a bulb
Front lamps
Model with Xenon headlamps (D1S)
1. Dual-function Xenon headlamps (dipped/
main): D1S
2. Cornering lighting: HP19
3. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps: LEDs
For the maintenance of the front lamps and
changing HP19 and D1S bulbs and LED lamps,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Risk of electrocution
Xenon bulbs must be replaced by
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
You are advised to change both D1S
bulbs at the same time, if one of them
has failed.
The headlamps are fitted with
polycarbonate glass with a protective
coating:
F do not clean them using a dry
or abrasive cloth, nor with a
detergent or solvent product,
F use a sponge and soapy water or
a pH neutral product,
F when using a high pressure washer
on persistent marks, do not keep
the lance directed towards the
lamps or their edges for too long,
so as not to damage their protective
coating and seals.
Changing a bulb should only be done
after the headlamp has been switched
off for several minutes (risk of serious
burns).
F Do not touch the bulb directly with
your fingers, use a lint-free cloth.
It is imperative to use only anti-
ultraviolet (UV) type bulbs to avoid
damaging the headlamp.
Always replace a failed bulb with a
new bulb with the same type and
specification.
Practical information
194
Dipped beam headlamps
F Remove the protective cap B.
F Disconnect the connector by pressing it
between the thumb and index finger.
F Free the bulb from its two metal clamps.
F Take out the bulb.
F Replace the bulb, exerting a slight axial
force.
F Refit the connector, until it is all the way in.
F Refit the protective cap B.
Main beam headlamps
F Remove the protective cap A.
F Disengage the retaining spring.
F Remove the bulb and replace it, paying
attention to the direction of fitting.
F Refit the retaining spring.
F Refit the protective cap A.
Model with halogen headlamps
1. Main beams: H1
2. Dipped beams: H7
3. Directional lighting: H7
4. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps: LEDs
For the maintenance of the front lamps and
changing LED lamps, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
8
Practical information
195
Directional lamp
F Remove the protective cap C.
F Disconnect the connector by pressing it
between the thumb and index finger.
F Free the bulb from its two metal clamps.
F Take out the bulb.
F Replace the bulb, exerting a slight axial
force.
F Refit the connector, until it is all the way in.
F Refit the protective cap C.
Direction indicators
Bulbs: HP24
F Remove the fixing screw of cover A using a
torx tool, tip the cover over and remove.
F Remove the fixing screw of lamp B using
a torx tool, then pull the lamp to remove it
from the bumper.
F Detach the bulb C by pressing on bars 1
and 2.
F Disconnect the connector (pull whilst
pressing on the grey tongue using a flat
screwdriver).
F Replace the bulb.
F Refit the connector (push the grey tongue
in well).
F Refit the headlamp unit in the bumper.
F Refit the lamp screws.
F Position the cover using its guides and refit
the screws.
Practical information
196
Side repeaters
The side repeater is sealed.
If the bulb is faulty, replace the side repeater.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Front foglamps
Bulbs: H8
F Remove the fixing screw of cover A using a
torx tool, tip the cover over and remove.
F Remove the fixing screw of lamp B using a
torx tool, then pull on the lamp to remove it
from the bumper.
F Disconnect the connector D.
F Remove the bulb by performing a quarter
of a turn.
F Replace the bulb.
F Refit the connector D.
F Refit the headlamp unit in the bumper.
F Refit the lamp screws.
F Position the cover using its guides and refit
the screws.
When refitting, take care not to trap
the electrical wiring.
8
Practical information
197
Rear lamps (Saloon)
Identify the failed bulb.
1. Brake lamps and sidelamps: P21W/5W
2. Sidelamps: R5W
3. Reversing lamps: H21W
4. Foglamps: H21W
5. Direction indicators: PY21W
Boot lid-mounted lamps
F Refit the bulb holder H.
F Check that the bulb holder H is secured
correctly by the two clips E.
F Refit the connector G.
F Replace and fix the trim F with its 3 clips.
F Open the boot.
F Using a flat screwdriver, remove the 3 clips
which fix the trim in the lamp area.
F Partially remove the trim F.
F Disconnect the connector G.
F Unclip the bulb holder H.
F Replace the failed bulb.
Practical information
198
Wing-mounted lamps
F Remove the lateral boot trim flap A. To do
so, pull it towards the inside of the boot,
then pull it upwards.
F Disconnect connector B.
F Unscrew the 2 fixings C.
F Remove the lamp from its housing.
F Detach the bulb holder D.
F Replace the failed bulb.
F Refit the bulb holder D.
F Place the lamp in its housing.
F Screw in the 2 fixings C.
F Refit connector B.
F Refit the side boot trim A.
For vehicles fitted with a Hi-Fi amplifier, on the
right hand side slacken the screw by a quarter
turn, then pull the boot side trim A up.
You can use the wheelbrace to screw or
unscrew the fixings C.
8
Practical information
199
Tailgate-mounted lamps
Rear lamps (Tourer)
Identify the failed bulb.
1. Brake lamps and sidelamps: P21W/5W
2. Sidelamps: R5W
3. Reversing lamps: H21W
4. Foglamps: H21W
5. Direction indicators: PY21W
F Refit the bulb holder H ensuring that it is
correctly clipped in place.
F Position the lamp in its housing.
F Tighten the fixing nut G.
F Refit the connector F.
F Position and clip in place the plastic
cover E.
F Open the boot.
F Using a flat screwdriver, remove the plastic
cover E.
F Disconnect the connector F.
F Unscrew the fixing nut G.
F Disengage the lamp from its housing.
F Unclip the bulb holder H.
F Replace the failed bulb.
You can use the wheelbrace to screw or
unscrew the fixing nut G.
Practical information
200
Wing-mounted lamps
F Pull away the flap in the boot side trim A.
To do this, pull it towards the middle of the
boot, then pull it up.
F Disconnect the connector B.
F Unscrew the fixing nut C.
F Remove the lamp from its housing.
F Detach the bulb holder D.
F Replace the faulty bulb.
F Refit the bulb holder D.
F Place the lamp in its housing.
F Screw in the fixing nut C.
F Refit the connector B.
F Refit the side boot trim A.
For vehicles fitted with a Hi-Fi amplifier, on the
right hand side slacken the screw by a quarter
turn, then pull the boot side trim A up.
You can use the wheelbrace to screw or
unscrew the fixing nut C.
8
Practical information
201
F Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the
external holes of the lens.
F Push it outwards to unclip it.
Third brake lamp (LEDs)
For the replacement of this type of light emitting
diode lamp, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
F Remove the lens.
F Change the faulty bulb.
Number plate lamps (W5W)
Practical information
202
Interior lamps
Courtesy lamps
Bulb: W5W
F Unclip the transparent cover of the roof
lamp to reach the bulb.
Rear reading lamps (Tourer)
Bulb: W5W
F Detach the cover of the reading lamp to
access the bulb.
Map reading lamps
Bulb: W5W
F Detach the cover.
F If necessary, detach the partition of the
affected map reading lamp.
Boot lamp
Bulb: W5W
F Detach the lamp cover for access to the
bulb.
8
Practical information
203
Door aperture lamps
Bulb: W5W
F Detach the lamp cover for access to the
bulb.
Footwell lighting
Bulb: W5W
F Detach the lamp cover for access to the
bulb.
Glove box
Bulb: W5W
F Detach the lamp cover for access to the
bulb.
Practical information
204
Changing a fuse
The 2 fuseboxes are located below the dashboard and under the bonnet.
Before replacing a fuse, it is necessary to:
- determine the cause of the fault and have it
remedied,
- switch off all electric consumers,
- park the vehicle and switch off the ignition,
- identify the failed fuse using the allocation
tables and diagrams presented on the
following pages.
Good Failed
Tweezer
If the fault recurs soon after replacing the
fuse, have the electrical system checked by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
To replace a fuse, it is essential to:
- use the special tweezer, placed on the
cover close to the fuseboxes, to extract
the fuse from its holder and check the
condition of its filament,
- always replace a failed fuse by a fuse of
equivalent rating (same colour); a different
rating could cause a fault (risk of fire).
The replacement of a fuse not
mentioned in the tables below may
cause a serious fault on your vehicle.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
CITROËN declines all responsibility
for the costs incurred in repairing your
vehicle or faults resulting from the
installation of accessories that are not
supplied or recommended by CITROËN
and not installed in conformity with its
requirements, particularly when the
total consumption of additional devices
exceeds 10 milliamperes.
Installation of electrical
accessories
Your vehicle’s electrical system
is designed to operate with either
standard or optional equipment.
Before installing electrical equipment
or accessories on your vehicle, consult
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Replacing a fuse
8
Practical information
205
Fuses under the dashboard
Access to the fuses
F Open the glove box.
F Unclip the access cover.
Fusebox A
Fusebox B Fusebox C
Tweezer
Practical information
206
Fusebox B
Fuse N° Rating Function
G29 - Not used
G30 5 A Heated door mirrors
G31 5 A Rain and sunshine sensor
G32 5 A Seat belt not fastened warning lamps
G33 5 A Electrochrome rear view mirror
G34 20 A Sunroof (Saloon)
G35 5 A Passenger door lighting - passenger door mirror adjustment
G36 30 A Electric tailgate (tourer)
G37 20 A Heated front seats
G38 30 A Driver’s electric seat
G39 30 A Passenger’s electric seat - Hi-Fi amplifier
G40 3 A Trailer relay unit supply
Fuse N° Rating Function
G36 15 A 6 speed automatic gearbox
G37 10 A Daytime running lamps - Diagnostic socket
G38 3 A DSC/ASR
G39 10 A Hydraulic suspension
G40 3 A STOP switch
Fusebox A
8
Practical information
207
Fusebox C
Fuse N° Rating Function
F1 15 A Rear screen wipe (Tourer)
F2 30 A Locking and deadlocking relay
F3 5 A Airbags
F4 10 A Automatic gearbox - additional heater unit (Diesel) - electrochrome rear view mirror
F5 30 A Front window - sunroof - passenger door lighting - passenger door mirror adjustment
F6 30 A Rear window
F7 5 A Vanity mirror lighting - Glove box lighting - interior lamps - torch (Tourer)
F8 20 A Audio system - Steering mounted controls - Screen - Under-inflation detection - Motorised tailgate control unit
F9 30 A Cigarette lighter - front 12 V socket
F10 15 A Alarm - Steering mounted controls, signalling and wiper controls
F11 15 A Low current ignition switch
F12 15 A Driver’s electric seat - instrument panel - seat belt not fastened warning lamps -air conditioning controls
F13 5 A Engine relay unit - Hydraulic suspension pump cut-off relay - airbag control unit supply
F14 15 A
Rain and sunshine sensor - parking sensors - passenger’s electric seat - trailer relay unit - HIFI amplifier control
unit - Bluetooth system - Lane Departure Warning System
F15 30 A Locking and deadlocking relay
F17 40 A Heated rear screen - Heated door mirrors
FSH SHUNT STORAGE SHUNT
Practical information
208
Fuses under the bonnet
Access to the fuses
F Undo each screw by a quarter of a turn.
F Remove the cover.
F Replace the fuse.
Fuse N° Rating Function
F1 20 A Engine control unit
F2 15 A Horn
F3 10 A Screen wash pump
F4 10 A Headlamp wash pump
F5 15 A Starter
F6 10 A Airflow sensor - Directional headlamps - Diagnostic socket
F7 10 A Automatic gearbox selector lever lock - Power steering
F8 25 A Starter motor
F9 10 A Clutch switch - Stop switch
F10 30 A Actuator motors
F11 40 A Air conditioning blower
F12 30 A Wipers
F13 40 A BSI supply (ignition on)
F14 30 A -
F15 10 A Right-hand main beam
F16 10 A Left-hand main beam
F17 15 A Right-hand dipped beam
F18 15 A Left-hand dipped beam
F19 15 A Actuator motors
F20 10 A Actuator motors
F21 5 A Actuator motors
On completion, carefully refit the
cover to ensure correct sealing of
the fusebox.
Any work on the maxi-fuses (that
give additional protection), located
in the fuseboxes, must be left to
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Table of fuses
8
Practical information
209
Table of fuses
Fuse N° Rating Function
F6 25 A Rear 12 V socket (max power: 100 W)
F7 15 A Foglamps
F8 20 A Additional burner (Diesel)
F9 30 A Electric parking brake
Practical information
210
12 V battery
Access to the battery
The battery is located under the bonnet.
For access to it:
F open the bonnet using the interior release
lever, then the exterior safety catch,
F secure the bonnet stay,
F remove the plastic cover to gain access to
the two terminals,
F if necessary, unclip the fusebox to remove
the battery.
F Raise the lever D fully to release the
clamp E.
Disconnecting the (+) terminal
The presence of this label, in particular
with the Stop & Start system, indicates
the use of a 12 V lead-acid battery with
special technology and specification;
the involvement of a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop is essential
when replacing or disconnecting the
battery.
Procedure for starting the engine using another battery or charging your battery when it is flat.
Reconnecting the (+) terminal
F Position the open clamp E of the cable on
the positive post (+) of the battery.
F Press down on the clamp to position it
correctly on the battery post.
F Lock the clamp by lowering the lever D.
Do not force the lever as locking will
not be possible if the clamp is not
positioned correctly; start the procedure
again.
8
Practical information
211
Following reconnection of
the battery
Following reconnection of the battery,
switch on the ignition and wait 1 minute
before starting to permit initialisation
of the electronic systems. However, if
slight malfunctions remain following this
operation, contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
Referring to the corresponding section,
you must yourself reinitialise:
- the remote control key,
- the glass panoramic roof blind,
- the radio station presets, the date
and time in the audio system.
Starting using another
battery
If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be started using a slave battery
(external or on another vehicle) and jump lead
cables.
Before disconnecting the
battery
Wait 2 minutes after switching off the
ignition before disconnecting the battery.
Close the windows and the doors before
disconnecting the battery.
F Connect the red cable to the positive
terminal (+) of the flat battery A, then to the
positive terminal (+) of the slave battery B.
F Connect one end of the green or black
cable to the negative terminal (-) of the
slave battery B.
F Connect the other end of the green or black
cable to the earth point C on the broken
down vehicle.
F Start the engine on the other vehicle and
leave it running for a few minutes.
F Operate the starter, let the engine run.
If the engine does not start straight away,
switch the ignition off and wait a few
moments before trying again.
F Wait until the engine returns to idle and
disconnect the jump lead cables in reverse
order.
First check that the slave battery has a
nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity
at least equal to the battery on your
vehicle.
Do not try to start the engine by
connecting a battery charger.
Do not disconnect the battery (+)
terminal when the engine is running.
Practical information
212
Charging the battery using
a battery charger
F Disconnect the battery from the vehicle.
F Follow the instructions for use provided by
the manufacturer of the charger.
F Reconnect starting with the negative
terminal (-).
F Check that the terminals and connectors
are clean. If they are covered with sulphate
(whitish or greenish deposit), remove them
and clean them.
With Stop & Start, the battery does not
have to be disconnected for charging.
Some functions are not available if the
battery is not sufficiently charged.
Protect your eyes and face before
handling the battery.
All operations on the battery must be
carried out in a well ventilated area and
away from naked flames and sources
of sparks, so as to avoid the risk of
explosion or fire.
Do not try to charge a frozen battery;
the battery must first be thawed out to
avoid the risk of explosion. If the battery
has been frozen, before charging have
it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop who will check that
the internal components have not been
damaged and the casing is not cracked,
which could cause a leak of toxic and
corrosive acid.
Do not reverse the polarity and use only
a 12 V charger.
Do not disconnect the terminals while
the engine is running.
Do not charge the batteries without
disconnecting the terminals first.
Wash your hands afterwards.
It is advisable to disconnect the battery
if the vehicle is to be left unused for
more than one month.
The batteries contain harmful substances
such as sulphuric acid and lead. They
must be disposed of in accordance
with regulations and must not, in any
circumstances, be discarded with household
waste.
Take used remote control batteries and
vehicle batteries to a special collection point.
Do not push the vehicle to start the
engine if your vehicle has an automatic
gearbox.
After refitting the battery, the Stop &
Start system will only be active after a
continuous period of immobilisation of the
vehicle, a period which depends on the
climatic conditions and the state of charge
of the battery (up to about 8 hours).
8
Practical information
213
Energy economy mode
System which manages the duration of use of
certain functions to conserve a sufficient level
of charge in the battery.
After the engine has stopped, you can
still use functions such as the audio and
telematics system, windscreen wipers, dipped
beam headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for
a maximum combined duration of about
forty minutes.
Switching to economy mode
A message then appears in the instrument
panel screen indicating that the vehicle has
switched to economy mode and the active
functions are put on standby.
If a telephone call is being made at this
time, it will be maintained for around
10 minutes with the Bluetooth hands-
free system of your audio system.
Exiting economy mode
These functions are reactivated automatically
next time the vehicle is driven.
In order to restore the use of these functions
immediately, start the engine and let it run:
- for less than ten minutes, to use the
equipment for approximately five minutes,
- for more than ten minutes, to use the
equipment for up to approximately
thirty minutes.
Let the engine run for the duration specified to
ensure that the battery charge is sufficient.
Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the
engine in order to charge the battery.
A flat battery prevents the engine from
starting (refer to the "Battery" section).
Practical information
214
Towing the vehicle
Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using a removable towing eye.
The towing eye is installed in the jack box
placed in the spare wheel.
For access to it:
F open the boot,
F raise the floor,
F remove the towing eye from the jack box.
Access to the tools
General recommendations
Observe the legislation in force in your country.
Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is higher than that of the towed vehicle.
The driver must remain at the wheel of the towed vehicle and must have a valid driving
licence.
When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, always use an approved towing
arm; rope and straps are prohibited.
The towing vehicle must move off gently.
When towing a vehicle with the engine off, there is no longer any power assistance for
braking or steering.
In the following cases, you must always call on a professional recovery service:
- vehicle broken down on a motorway or fast road,
- four-wheel drive vehicle,
- when it is not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, unlock the steering, or release
the parking brake,
- towing with only two wheels on the ground,
- where there is no approved towing arm available...
8
Practical information
215
F On the front bumper, unclip the cover by
levering at the bottom with the flat end of
the towing eye.
F Screw the towing eye in fully.
F Attach a towing arm.
F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on
both vehicles.
Towing your vehicle
Failure to observe this recommendation
could result in damage to certain
braking components and the absence
of braking assistance the next time the
engine is started.
In the event of a problem or malfunction
with the automatic gearbox, the vehicle
may be immobilised with a gear
engaged. In this case the front of the
vehicle must be lifted for towing.
F On the rear bumper, unclip the cover:
● by pressing at the bottom,
● then by levering at the top using the flat
end of the towing eye.
F Screw the towing eye in fully.
F Attach a towing arm.
F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on
both vehicles.
Towing another vehicle
F Place the gear lever in neutral (position N
with an automatic gearbox).
Practical information
216
Towing a trailer
Your vehicle is primarily designed for transporting people and luggage, but it may also be used for towing a trailer.
Side wind
F Take into account the increased sensitivity
to side wind.
Driving advice
Cooling
Towing a trailer on a slope increases the
temperature of the coolant.
As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling
capacity is not dependent on the engine speed.
F To lower the engine speed, reduce your
speed.
The maximum towed load on a long incline
depends on the gradient and the ambient
temperature.
In all cases, keep a check on the coolant
temperature.
We recommend the use of genuine
CITROËN towbars and their harnesses
that have been tested and approved
from the design stage of your vehicle,
and that the fitting of the towbar is
entrusted to a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If the towbar is not fitted by a
CITROËN dealer, it must still be
fitted in accordance with the vehicle
manufacturer's instructions.
Driving with a trailer places greater demands
on the towing vehicle and the driver must take
particular care.
Distribution of loads
F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
heaviest items are as close as possible to
the axle and the nose weight approaches
the maximum permitted without
exceeding it.
Air density decreases with altitude, thus
reducing engine performance. Above
1 000 metres, the maximum towed load must
be reduced by 10 % for every 1 000 metres of
altitude.
F If the warning lamp and the
STOP warning lamp come on,
stop the vehicle and switch off
the engine as soon as possible.
Refer to the "Technical data" section for
details of the weights and towed loads
which apply to your vehicle.
8
Practical information
217
Blanking cover
When towing, you must remove the blanking
cover in the front bumper as well as the bonnet
seal if fitted.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop for this.
Tyres
F Check the tyre pressures of the towing
vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
recommended pressures.
Lighting
F Check the electrical lighting and signalling
on the trailer.
The rear parking sensors will be
deactivated automatically if a genuine
CITROËN towbar is used.
Braking
Towing a trailer increases the braking distance.
To avoid overheating of the brakes on a long
mountain type of descent, the use of engine
braking is recommended.
Practical information
218
Roof bars
The design of your vehicle requires the use
of roof bars that are tested and approved by
CITROËN, for your safety and to avoid damage
to the roof and tailgate.
Regardless of the type of loading equipment
to be transported on the roof (bicycle carrier,
ski carrier...), it is imperative that you add
transverse roof bars. Any securing or lashing to
components other than the roof bars is strictly
prohibited.
Recommendations
F Distribute your load evenly, avoiding
overloading on one side.
F Arrange the heaviest part of the load as
close as possible to the roof.
F Anchor the load securely and draw
attention to it if any part of it is
overhanging.
F Drive gently, as the vehicle will be more
liable to the effects of side winds (vehicle
stability may be altered).
F Remove the roof bars as soon as they are
no longer needed.
Maximum load that can be distributed
on the roof bars (for a loading height
not exceeding 40 cm; except bicycle
carrier): 80 kg.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt your
speed to the profile of the road to avoid
damaging the roof bars and the fixings
on the roof.
Please refer to national legislation in
order to comply with the regulations
concerning the transportation of objects
which are longer than the vehicle.
8
Practical information
219
Very cold climate protection*
HDi 160 Diesel engine
Normal position
The flap 2 is in a horizontal position in the air
duct 3.
Snow position
F Push and rotate the knob 1 by 90 ° in the
direction of the arrow in order to position
the flap 2 in a vertical position in the air
duct 3.
To return to the normal position, push the
knob 1 then rotate in the opposite direction.
It is essential to remove the very cold
protection when:
-
the ambient temperature exceeds 10 °C.
-
driving at speeds of over 75 mph
(approximately 120 km/h).
Adjustable device which prevents the intake of snow particles, which could obstruct the air filter.
* Depending on the country of sale.
Practical information
220
Cold climate screen*
Fitting
F Offer up the 2 sections of the snow guard
to the upper and lower sections of the front
bumper.
F Press on the surround to clip in one by one
the fixing clips.
Remove
F Using a screwdriver, lever each fixing clip
in turn to disengage them.
Before fitting
After fitting
Don't forget to remove the very cold climate
screen when:
-
the ambient temperature exceeds 10 °C,
-
towing,
-
When driving at speeds of over 75 mph
(approximately 120 km/h).
Removable screen which prevents the accumulation of snow at the radiator cooling fan.
* Depending on the country of sale.
8
Practical information
221
* To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned and
secured correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
Accessories
"Comfort":
front and rear parking sensors, isotherm
module, reading lamp, sun blinds, headrest-
mounted coat hanger...
"Transport solutions":
boot liner, boot carpet, towbars, towbar wiring
harness, transverse roof bars, bicycle carrier,
ski carrier, roof boxes, boot dividers, boot net,
boot organiser, sliding boot tray, platform on
towbar, ...
"Style":
alloy wheels, rear spoiler, chromed mirror
shells, door sill protectors, gear lever knobs...
"Security and safety":
anti-intrusion alarm, warning triangle and
high visibility vest, breathalyzer, first aid kit,
snow chains, non-skid covers, security wheel
bolts, vehicle tracking system, child seats, fire
extinguisher, caravan mirror, pet cage and seat
belt, dog guard...
"Protection":
mats*, seat covers, mud flaps, bumper
protectors, vehicle covers, door and boot sill
protectors...
A wide range of accessories and genuine parts is available from the CITROËN dealer network.
These accessories and parts are all suitable for your vehicle and benefit from CITROËN's recommendation and warranty.
Practical information
222
"Multimedia":
Wi-Fi on board, 230V socket, audio systems,
speakers, semi-integral navigation systems,
portable navigation systems, hands-free kit,
DVD player, USB Box, mapping update CD,
driving aid, Hi-Fi module...
The fitting of electrical equipment or
accessories which are not recommended
by CITROËN may result in a failure of
your vehicle's electronic system and
excessive electrical consumption.
Contact a CITROËN dealer
for information on the range of
recommended equipment and
accessories.
Installation of radio
communication transmitters
Before installing any after-market radio
communication transmitter, you can
contact a CITROËN dealer for the
specification of transmitters which can
be fitted (frequency, maximum power,
aerial position, specific installation
requirements), in line with the Vehicle
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive (2004/104/EC).
Depending on the legislation in force in
the country, certain safety equipment
may be compulsory: high visibility
safety vests, warning triangles,
breathalyzers, spare bulbs, spare fuses,
fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud flaps
at the rear of the vehicle.
9
Checks
223
TOTAL & CITROËN
Partners in performance
and protecting
the environment
Innovation in the search for
performance
For over 40 year, the TOTAL Research and
Development departments have developed
lubricants for CITROËN, to match the latest
technical innovations on CITROËN vehicles, both for
competition and for everyday motoring.
For you, this is an assurance that you will obtain the
best performance from your engine.
Optimum protection for your
engine
By having your CITROËN vehicle
serviced with TOTAL lubricants, you are
contributing towards improving the life
and performance of your engine, while
also protecting the environment.
Checks
224
Bonnet
Opening
F
At the front of the bonnet, lift the safety catch B and raise the bonnet.
F Unclip the stay C from its housing and pivot
it to insert it in the notch D indicated by a
yellow arrow.
F Fix the stay in the notch to hold the bonnet
open.
Closing
F Take the stay out of the support notch.
F Clip the stay in its housing.
F Lower the bonnet then slam it firmly at the
end of its travel.
F Pull on the bonnet to check that it is fully
closed.
F Open the left hand front door.
F Pull the interior bonnet release lever A,
located at the bottom of the door frame.
Before doing anything under the bonnet,
switch off the Stop & Start system to
avoid any risk of injury resulting from an
automatic change to START mode.
The location of the interior release lever
prevents opening of the bonnet while
the left hand front door is closed.
This operation must only be carried out
when the vehicle is stationary.
Avoid opening the bonnet in strong
winds.
When the engine is hot, handle the
safety catch and bonnet stay with care
(risk of burns).
Because of the presence of electrical
equipment under the bonnet, it is
recommended that exposure to water
(rain, washing, ...) be limited.
The cooling fan may start after
switching off the engine: take care
with articles and clothing that might
be caught by the fan blades.
9
Checks
225
The various caps and covers allow access for
checking fluid levels and for replacing certain
components.
THP
Petrol engines
1. Screenwash and headlamp wash fluid
reservoir.
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
or
or power steering and Hydractive III +
suspension fluid reservoir.
3. Engine coolant header tank.
4. Engine oil dipstick.
5. Engine oil filler cap.
6. Brake fluid reservoir.
7. Battery.
8. Air filter.
Checks
226
Diesel engines
HDi 160
BlueHDi 150 / BlueHDi 180
The various caps and covers allow access
for checking fluid levels, for replacing certain
components and for priming the fuel system.
1. Screenwash and headlamp wash fluid
reservoir.
2. Power steering fluid reservoir
or
power steering and Hydractive III +
suspension fluid reservoir.
3. Engine coolant header tank.
4. Engine oil dipstick.
5. Engine oil filler cap.
6. Air filter.
7. Brake fluid reservoir.
8. Battery.
The Diesel fuel system operates under
high pressure:
- Never carry out any work on this
system yourself.
- HDi engines make use of advanced
technology.
All maintenance and repairs require
specially trained staff, which only a
CITROËN dealer can provide.
9
Checks
227
Checking levels
Engine oil level
The check is carried out either when
the ignition is switched on using the
oil level indicator in the instrument
panel for vehicles so equipped, or
using the dipstick.
Check all of these levels regularly, in line with the manufacturer's service schedule. Top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.
If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
If you find that the level is above the A mark or
below the B mark, do not start the engine.
- If the level is above the MAX mark (risk
of damage to the engine), contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
- If the level is below the MIN mark, you
must top up the engine oil.
Take care when working under the
bonnet, as certain areas of the engine
may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and
the cooling fan could start at any time
(even with the ignition off).
To ensure that the reading is correct, your
vehicle must be parked on a level surface
with the engine having been off for more than
30 minutes.
It is normal to top up the oil level between
two services (or oil changes). CITROËN
recommends that you check the level, and top
up if necessary, every 3 000 miles (5 000 kms).
Checking using the dipstick
F Locate the dipstick in the engine
compartment of your vehicle.
Refer to the "Petrol engine" or "Diesel engine"
section.
F Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and
remove it completely.
F Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean
non-fluffy cloth.
F Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then
pull it out again to make the visual check:
the correct level is between the marks A
and B.
A = MAX
B = MIN
Checks
228
Oil grade
Before topping-up the oil or changing the oil,
check that the oil is the correct grade for your
engine and conforms to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Topping up the engine oil level
F Locate the oil filler cap in the engine
compartment of your vehicle.
Refer to the "Petrol engine" or "Diesel engine"
section.
F Unscrew the oil filler cap to reveal the filler
aperture.
F Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any
spills on engine components (risk of fire).
F Wait a few minutes before checking the
level again using the dipstick.
F Add more oil if necessary.
F After checking the level, carefully refit the
oil filler cap and the dipstick in its tube.
After topping up the oil, the check when
switching on the ignition with the oil
level indicator in the instrument panel
is not valid during the 30 minutes after
topping up.
Engine oil change
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule
for details of the interval for this operation.
In order to maintain the reliability of the engine
and emission control system, never use
additives in the engine oil.
9
Checks
229
Brake fluid level
The brake fluid level should be close
to the "MAX" mark. If it is not, check
the brake pad wear.
Changing the uid
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule
for details of the interval for this operation.
Fluid specication
The brake fluid must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Power steering or power
steering and suspension
fluid level
For topping up, it is necessary to go
to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Coolant level
The coolant level should be close
to the "MAX" mark but should never
exceed it.
Changing the coolant
The coolant does not have to be replaced at
routine services.
Fluid specication
The coolant must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
The cooling fan may start after switching
off the engine: take care with articles and
clothing that might be caught by the fan
blades.
In addition, as the cooling system is pressurised,
wait at least one hour after switching off the
engine before carrying out any work.
To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew the cap
by two turns to allow the pressure to drop. When
the pressure has dropped, remove the cap and
top up the level.
When the engine is warm, the temperature of
the coolant is regulated by the fan.
Checks
230
Diesel additive level
(Diesel engine with
particle filter)
Topping up
This additive must be topped up by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
Used products
A low additive level is indicated by
illumination of this warning lamp,
accompanied by an audible warning
and a message in the instrument
panel screen.
Screenwash and headlamp
wash fluid
In the case of vehicles fitted with
headlamp washers, the low fluid level
is indicated by an audible signal and
a message in the screen.
Fluid specication
For optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing,
this fluid must not be topped up with or
replaced with plain water.
Reservoir capacity (depending on version).
- screenwash fluid: approximately 3.5 litres,
- screenwash and headlamp wash fluid:
approximately 6.15 litres.
Top up the reservoir when you next stop
the vehicle.
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or
fluids with the skin.
Most of these fluids are harmful to
health or indeed very corrosive.
Do not discard used oil or fluids into
sewers or onto the ground.
Take used oil to a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop (France) or to an
authorised waste disposal site.
9
Checks
231
Checks
12 V battery
The battery does not require any maintenance.
However, check that the terminals are clean
and correctly tightened, particularly in summer
and winter.
The presence of this label, in particular with
the Stop & Start system, indicates the use of
a specific 12 V lead-acid battery with special
technology and specification. The involvement
of a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
is essential when replacing or disconnecting
the battery.
Unless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the manufacturer's service schedule and according to your engine.
Otherwise, have them checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Air filter and passenger compartment filter
Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty
atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle (e.g.
city driving), replace them twice as often if
necessary.
A clogged passenger compartment filter may
have an adverse effect on the performance
of the air conditioning system and generate
undesirable odours.
Replace the oil filter each time the
engine oil is changed.
Oil filter
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule
for details of the replacement interval for this
component.
Refer to the manufacturer's
service schedule for details of the
replacement intervals for these
components.
When carrying out work on the battery,
refer to the "12 V battery" section for
details of the precautions to be taken
before disconnecting the battery and
following its reconnection.
Checks
232
Manual gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Automatic gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule
for the checking interval for this component.
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule
for details of the level checking interval for this
component.
Particle filter system
(Diesel)
Complementary to the catalytic converter,
this filter makes an active contribution to the
preservation of air quality by trapping unburnt
pollutant particles. Black exhaust fumes are
thus no longer emitted.
After prolonged idling or driving at very low
speeds, you may occasionally notice water
vapour being emitted from the exhaust when
accelerating. This is of no consequence to the
running of the vehicle or to the environment.
If there is risk of blockage, a message
appears in the instrument panel screen,
accompanied by an audible signal and
illumination of the service warning lamp.
This alert tells you that the particle filter
is approaching saturation (in conditions
of urban driving of exceptionally long
duration: low speeds, traffic jams etc.)
To regenerate the filter, it is advised to
drive as soon as possible, when traffic
conditions permit, at a speed of 40 mph
(around 60 km/h) or more for at least
five minutes (until the alert message
disappears).
If this alert persists, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
9
Checks
233
Brake pads
Brake wear depends on the style
of driving, particularly in the case
of vehicles used in town, over short
distances. It may be necessary to have
the condition of the brakes checked,
even between vehicle services.
Brake disc wear
For information on checking brake
disc wear, contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in
the brake fluid level indicates that the brake
pads are worn.
Manual parking
brake
Only use products recommended by
CITROËN or products of equivalent
quality and specification.
In order to optimise the operation of
units as important as those in the
braking system, CITROËN selects and
offers very specific products.
After washing the vehicle, dampness,
or in wintry conditions, ice can form
on the brake discs and pads: braking
efficiency may be reduced. Make light
brake applications to dry and defrost
the brakes.
If a loss of effectiveness of this
system is noticed, the parking
brake must be checked, even
between two services.
Checking this system must be done by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Electric parking
brake
This system does not require any
routine servicing. However, in the
event of a problem, have the system
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
For more information, refer to the
"Electric parking brake - Operating
faults" section.
Checks
234
AdBlue
®
additive and SCR system
for BlueHDi Diesel engines
To assure respect for the environment and
conformity with the new Euro 6 emissions
standard, without adversely affecting the
performance or fuel consumption of Diesel
engines, CITROËN has taken the decision to
equip its vehicles with an effective system that
associates SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction)
with a particle filter (FAP) for the treatment of
exhaust gases.
Presentation of the SCR system
Using an additive called AdBlue
®
containing
urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85%
of nitrous oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and
water, which are harmless to health and the
environment.
The AdBlue
®
additive is held in a special
tank located under the boot at the rear of
the vehicle. It has a capacity of 17 litres: this
provides a driving range of about 12 500 miles
(20 000 km), after which an alert is triggered
warning you when the reserve remaining is
enough for just 1 500 miles (2 400 km).
During each scheduled service of your vehicle
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop,
the AdBlue
®
additive tank is refilled in order to
allow normal operation of the SCR system.
If the estimated mileage between two services
is greater than 12 500 miles (20 000 km), we
recommend that you go to a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop to have the necessary
top-up carried out.
Once the AdBlue
®
tank is empty,
a system required by regulations
prevents starting of the engine.
If the SCR is faulty, the level of
emissions from your vehicle will no
longer meet the Euro 6 standard: you
vehicle becomes polluting.
In the event of a confirmed fault
with the SCR system, you must go
to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible: after
a running distance of 650 miles
(1 100 km), a system will be triggered
automatically to prevent engine starting.
9
Checks
235
Range indicators
Once the AdBlue
®
tank is on reserve or after
detection of a fault with the SCR emissions
control system, when the ignition is switched
on, an indicator displays an estimate of the
distance that can be covered, the range, before
engine starting is prevented.
In the event of simultaneous system fault and
low AdBlue
®
level, the shortest range figure is
the one displayed.
In the event of the risk of non-starting related to a lack of AdBlue
®
Range greater than 1 500 miles (2 400 km)
When the ignition is switched on, no
information on range is displayed automatically
in the instrument panel.
Pressing this button displays the driving range
temporarily.
Above 3 000 miles (5 000 km), the value is not
specified.
The engine start prevention system
required by regulations is activated
automatically once the AdBlue
®
tank is
empty.
Checks
236
When switching on the ignition, the
UREA warning lamp comes on, accompanied
by an audible signal and the display of a
message (e.g.: "Top up emissions additive:
Starting prevented in 900 miles") indicating
the remaining range expressed in miles or
kilometres.
When driving, the message is displayed every
200 miles (300 km) until the additive tank has
been topped-up.
Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the AdBlue
®
tank topped-up.
You can also top-up the tank yourself.
Refer to the "Topping-up" section.
When switching on the ignition, the SERVICE
warning lamp comes on and the UREA warning
lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible
signal and the display of a message (e.g. "Top
up emissions additive: Starting prevented in
350 miles") indicating the remaining range
expressed in miles or kilometres.
When driving, the message is displayed every
30 seconds until the additive tank has been
topped-up.
Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the AdBlue
®
tank topped-up.
You can also top-up the tank yourself.
Refer to the "Topping-up" section.
Otherwise you will not be able to restart your
engine.
When switching on the ignition, the SERVICE
warning lamp comes on and the UREA warning
lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible
signal and the display of the message "Top up
emissions additive: Starting prevented".
The AdBlue
®
tank is empty: the system required
by regulations prevents engine starting.
To be able to start the engine,
we recommend that you call on
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop for the top-up required. If
you carry out the top-up yourself, it is
essential to add at least 3.8 litres of
AdBlue
®
to the tank.
Refer to the "Topping-up" section.
Remaining range between 350 and 1500 miles (600 and 2 400 km)
Remaining range between 0 and 350 miles (0 and 600 km)
Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue
®
additive
9
Checks
237
In the event of a fault with the the SCR emissions
control system
The UREA, SERVICE and diagnostic warning
lamps comes on, accompanied by an audible
signal and the display of the message
"Emissions fault".
The alert is triggered when driving when the
fault is detected for the first time, then when
switching on the ignition for subsequent
journeys, while the fault persists.
If it is a temporary fault, the alert
disappears during the next journey,
after self-diagnosis of the SCR system.
During an authorised driving phase (between
650 miles and 0 miles) (1 100 km and 0 km)
A system that prevents engine starting
is activated automatically from
650 miles (1 100 km) after confirmation
of a fault with the SCR emissions
control system. Have the system
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop as soon as possible.
In the event of the detection
of a fault
If a fault with the SCR system is confirmed
(after 30 miles (50 km) covered with the
permanent display of the message signalling
a fault), the SERVICE and engine diagnostic
warning lamps come on and the UREA
warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an
audible signal and the display of a message
(e.g.: "Emissions fault: Starting prevented in
150 miles") indicating the remaining range
express in miles or kilometres.
While driving, the message is displayed every
30 seconds while the fault with the SCR system
persists.
The alert is repeated when switching on the
ignition.
You should go to a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop as soon as possible.
Otherwise, you will not be able to restart your
engine.
Checks
238
Every time the ignition is switched on, the
SERVICE and engine diagnostic warning
lamps come on and the UREA warning lamp
flashes, accompanied by an audible signal and
the display of the message "Emissions fault:
Starting prevented".
You have exceeded the authorised
driving limit: the starting prevention
system inhibits engine starting.
Freezing of the AdBlue
®
additive
The AdBlue
®
additive freezes at
temperatures below around -11°C.
The SCR system includes a heater
for the AdBlue
®
tank, allowing you to
continue driving in very cold conditions.
Starting prevented
To be able to start the engine, you must call on
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
9
Checks
239
Precautions in use
The AdBlue
®
additive is an urea-based
solution. This liquid is non-flammable,
colourless and odourless (kept in a cool area).
In the event of contact with the skin, wash
the affected area with soap and water. In the
event of contact with the eyes, wash (irrigate)
the eyes with large amounts of water or with
an eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes.
If a burning sensation or irritation persists, get
medical attention.
If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth
with clean water and then drink plenty of water.
In certain conditions (high ambient
temperature, for example), the risk of release
of ammonia cannot be excluded: do not inhale
the product. Ammonia vapour has en irritant
effect on mucous membranes (eyes, nose and
throat).
Keep AdBlue
®
out of the reach of
children, in its original bottle.
Never transfer AdBlue
®
to another
container: it would lose its purity.
Use only AdBlue
®
additive that meets the
ISO 22241 standard.
Never dilute the additive with water.
Never pour the additive into the Diesel
fuel tank.
The supply in a non-drip bottle simplifies
toping-up. You can obtain 1.89 litre (half a
US gallon) bottles from a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Never top-up from an AdBlue
®
dispenser reserved for heavy goods
vehicles.
Topping-up the AdBlue
®
additive
Filling the AdBlue
®
tank is an operation
included in every routine service on your
vehicle by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Nevertheless, given the capacity of the tank,
it may be necessary to top-up the additive
between services, more particularly if an alert
(warning lamps and a message) signals the
requirement.
You can got to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
If you envisage topping-up yourself, please
read the following warnings carefully.
Checks
240
Recommendations on storage
AdBlue
®
freezes at about -11°C and
deteriorates above 25°C. It is recommended
that bottles be stored in a cool area and
protected from direct sunlight.
Under these conditions, the additive can be
kept for at least a year.
If the additive has frozen, it can be used once it
has completely thawed out.
Never store bottles of AdBlue
®
in your
vehicle.
Procedure
Before topping-up, ensure that the vehicle is
parked on a flat and level surface.
In wintry conditions, ensure that the
temperature of the vehicle is above -11°C.
Otherwise, by freezing, the AdBlue
®
cannot
be poured into its tank. Park your vehicle in a
warmer area for a few hours to allow the top-up
to be carried out.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key.
F For access to the AdBlue
®
tank, raise the
boot carpet then, depending on equipment,
lift out the spare wheel and/or the
storage box.
F Without pressing, turn the black cap a
quarter turn anti-clockwise and lift it off.
F Turn the blue cap a 6
th
of a turn
anti-clockwise.
F Lift off the cap.
9
Checks
241
F Refit the blue cap to the tank and turn
it a 6
th
of a turn clockwise, to its stop.
F Refit the black cap and turn it a quarter of
a turn clockwise without pressing. Ensure
that the indicator on the cap lines up with
the indicator on the support.
F Depending on equipment, return the spare
wheel and/or the storage box to the bottom
of the boot.
F Refit the boot carpet and close the tailgate.
Important: in the event of a top-up
after a breakdown because of a lack
of additive, signalled by the message
"Top up emissions additive: Starting
prevented", you must wait around
5 minutes before switching on the ignition,
without opening the driver's door,
locking the vehicle or introducing the
key into the ignition switch.
Switch on the ignition, then, after
10 seconds, start the engine.
Never dispose of AdBlue
®
additive
bottles in the household waste. Place
them in a special container provided
this purpose or take them to your dealer.
If any additive is split or splashed, wash
immediately with cold water or wipe with
a damp cloth.
If the additive has crystallised, clean it
off using a sponge and hot water.
F After emptying the bottle, wipe away any
spillage around the tank filler using a damp
cloth.
Important: if your vehicle's
AdBlue
®
tank is completely empty -
which is confirmed by the alert
messages and the impossibility of
starting the engine, you must add at
least 3.8 litres (so two 1.89 litre bottles).
F Obtain a bottle of AdBlue
®
. After first
checking the use-by date, read carefully
the instructions on use on the label before
pouring the contents of the bottle into your
vehicle's AdBlue
®
tank.
Technical data
242
Engines and gearboxes
Petrol engine THP 155
THP 160
THP 150
Gearbox Automatic (6-speed) Automatic (6-speed)
Model code:
RD... RW...
5FV-A
5FN-A**
5FM-A
5FE-A/D**
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 598 1 598
Bore x stroke (mm) 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8
EU standard maximum power (kW)* / hp DIN 115 / 110** 120 / 110**
Maximum power engine speed (rpm) 6 000 6 000
EU standard maximum torque (Nm) 240 240
Maximum torque engine speed (rpm) 1 400 1 400
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded
Catalytic converter Yes Yes
Engine oil capacity (with filter replacement) 4.25 4.25
* The maximum power corresponds to the type approved value on a test bed, under conditions defined by European legislation
(directive 1999/99/EC).
** In Russia, the maximum power is 110 kW and in Brazil, the maximum power is 120 kW.
RD...: Saloon.
RW...: Tourer.
10
Technical data
243
Weights and towed loads (in kg)
Petrol engine THP 155
THP 160
THP 150
Gearbox Automatic (6-speed) Automatic (6-speed)
Model code
RD 5FV-A
RD 5FN-A
RW 5FV-A
RW 5FN-A
RD 5FM-A
RD 5FE-A/D
RW 5FM-A
RW 5FE-A/D
Body Saloon Tourer Saloon Tourer
Unladen weight 1 515 1 534 1 515 1 534
Kerb weight 1 590 1 609 1 590 1 609
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 026 2 200 2 026 2 200
Gross train weight (GTW) 3 526 3 700 2 526 2 700
Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
- on a 10% or 12% slope
1 500 1 500 500 500
Braked trailer* (with load transfer within GTW
limit)
1 710 1 790 710 790
Unbraked trailer 750 750 500 500
Recommended nose weight 69 74 69 74
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The maximum authorised speed is reduced when towing (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when the ambient temperature is
higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by the same
amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
Technical data
244
RD...: Saloon.
RW...: Tourer.
* The maximum power corresponds to the type approved value on a test bed, under conditions defined by European legislation
(directive 1999/99/EC).
Engines and gearboxes
Diesel engine BlueHDi 150 S&S HDi 160 BlueHDi 180 S&S
Gearbox Manual (6-speed) Automatic (6-speed) EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
Model code:
RD... RW...
AHR-M/S RHH-A AHW-T/S
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 997 1 997 1 997
Bore x stroke (mm) 85 x 88 85 x 88 85 x 88
EU standard maximum power (kW)* 110 120 133
Maximum power engine speed (rpm) 4 000 3 750 3 750
EU standard maximum torque (Nm) 370 340 400
Maximum torque engine speed (rpm) 2 000 2 000 2 000
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes
Particle filter (FAP) Yes Yes Yes
Engine oil capacity (with filter replacement) 5.1 5.5 5.1
.../S: model fitted with Stop & Start.
10
Technical data
245
Diesel engine BlueHDi 160 S&S HDi 160 BlueHDi 180 S&S
Gearbox Manual (6-speed) Automatic (6-speed) EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
Model code RD AHR-M/S RW AHR-M/S RD RHH-A RW RHH-A RD AHW-T/S RW AHW-T/S
Body Saloon Tourer Saloon Tourer Saloon Tourer
Unladen weight 1 540 1 575 1 609 1 642 1 620 1 655
Kerb weight 1 615 1 650 1 684 1 717 1 695 1 730
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 2 160 2 235 2 190 2 286 2 190 2 290
Gross train weight (GTW) 3 660 3 635 3 290 3 286 3 290 3 290
Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
- on a 10% or 12% slope
1 500 1 400 1 100 1 000 1 100 1 000
Braked trailer* (with load transfer within GTW
limit)
1 750 1 650 1 390 1 290 1 350 1 250
Unbraked trailer 750 750 750 750 750 750
Recommended nose weight 73 67 57 53 57 51
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The maximum authorised speed is reduced when towing (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when the ambient temperature is
higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased within the GTW limit, on condition that the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by the same
amount; warning, towing with a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
Weights and towed loads (in kg)
Technical data
246
Dimensions (in mm)
Exterior (Saloon)
A 2 815
B 1 054
C 910
D 4 779
E 1 586
F 2 096
G 1 557
H 1 860
I*
1 451
1 458**
* Without roof bars.
** With metal spring suspension.
10
Technical data
247
Interior (Saloon)
A 1 030
B 1 115
C 566
D 504
E 1 040
F 1 705
Technical data
248
Exterior (Tourer)
A 2 815
B
1 054
1 065***
C 959
D
4 829
4 840***
E 1 586
F 2 096
G 1 557
H 1 860
I*
1 479
1 483**
* Without roof bars.
** With metal spring suspension.
*** Crosstourer version.
10
Technical data
249
Interior (Tourer)
A 1 060
B 1 115
C 510
D 851
E 1 058
F 1 723
Technical data
250
Identication markings
Various visible markings for identification of the vehicle.
Refer also to the registration document for your vehicle for the vehicle type, serial number, the weights...
All genuine CITROËN replacement parts are available exclusively within the dealer network.
For your safety and in order to remain within the terms of the warranty, you are advised to use only
CITROËN replacement parts.
D. Tyre / paint label
Affixed to the left hand centre door pillar, it
bears the following information:
- Tyre pressures, laden and unladen.
- Tyre sizes (including the load index and
speed rating).
- Tyre pressure for the spare wheel.
- Paint colour code.
Observe the tyre pressures indicated by
CITROËN.
Check the tyre pressures at least
monthly, when cold.
A. Manufacturer's label.
- Gross train weight (GTW).
- Maximum weight on front axle.
- Maximum weight on rear axle.
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
under the bonnet
C. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) at
the bottom of the windscreen aperture
Never deflate a warm tyre.
When changing tyres, it is essential to
use the sizes recommended for your
vehicle.
Low tyre pressures increase the fuel
consumption of your vehicle.
Affixed to the left hand centre door pillar, it
bears the following information:
- Manufacturer's name.
- EU type approval number.
- Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW).
.
Audio and Telematics
251
Emergency or assistance call
If an impact is detected by the airbag
control unit, and independently of
the deployment of any airbags, an
emergency call is made automatically.
Localised Emergency Call
In an emergency, press this
button for more than 2 seconds.
Flashing of the green indicator
lamp and a voice message
confirm that the call has
been made to the "Localised
Emergency Call"* centre.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels
the call.
The green indicator lamp goes off.
At any time, pressing this button for more than
8 seconds cancels the call.
The green indicator lamp remains on (without
flashing) when communication is established.
It goes off at the end of the call.
This call is dealt with by the "Localised
Emergency Call" centre, which receives
locating information from the vehicle and
can send a detailed alert to the appropriate
emergency services.
In countries in which a centre is not
operational, or when the locating service
has been expressly declined, the call is dealt
with directly by the emergency services (112)
without the vehicle location.
* These services are subject to conditions and
availability.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
If you benefit from the CITROËN
Connect Box offer with the SOS and
assistance pack included, there are
additional services available to you in
your MyCITROËN personal space, via
the CITROËN Internet website in your
country, accessible on www.citroen.com.
Audio and Telematics
252
Localised Assistance Call
If you purchased your vehicle outside
the CITROËN dealer network, we
invite you to have a dealer check the
configuration of these services and, if
desired, modified to suit your wishes.
In a multi-lingual country, configuration
is possible in the official national
language of your choice.
For technical reasons, particularly
to improve the quality of Telematic
services to customers, the
manufacturer reserves the right to
carry out updates to the vehicle's
on-board telematic system.
The fault with the system does not
prevent the vehicle being driven.
Press this button for more than
2 seconds to request assistance
if the vehicle breaks down.
A voice message confirms that
the call has been started*.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels
the request.
The cancellation is confirmed by a voice
message.
The orange indicator lamp is on fixed: the back-
up battery should be replaced.
In both cases, the emergency and assistance
calls service may not work.
Contact a qualified repairer as soon as
possible.
Operation of the system
When the ignition is switched on,
the green indicator lamp comes
on for 3 seconds indicating that
the system is operating correctly.
The orange indicator lamp
flashes then goes off: the system
has a fault.
* These services are subject to conditions and
availability.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
.
Audio and Telematics
253
7-inch touch screen tablet
GPS satellite navigation - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth
®
telephone
Contents
First steps 254
Steering mounted controls 256
Menus 257
Navigation 258
Navigation - Guidance 266
Traf c 270
Radio Media 272
Radio 278
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 280
Media 282
Settings 286
Internet 294
Internet browser 295
MirrorLink
TM
298
Telephone 300
Frequently asked questions 308
The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in
your vehicle.
As a safety measure, the driver should only carry out operations
which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.
The display of the energy economy mode message signals
that the system is about to go into standby. Refer to the Energy
economy (mode) section.
Audio and Telematics
254
First steps
Use the buttons arranged below the touch
screen tablet for access to the menu carousel,
then press the virtual buttons in the touch
screen tablet.
Each menu is displayed in one or two pages
(primary page and secondary page).
Secondary pagePrimary page
In very hot conditions, the system may
go into stand-by (screen and sound
completely off) for a minimum period of
5 minutes.
.
Audio and Telematics
255
Volume adjustment (each source is
independent, including traffic announcements
(TA) and navigation instructions).
Press Menu to display the menu
carousel.
Increase volume.
Reduce volume.
Selecting the audio source (depending on version):
- "FM" / "AM" / "DAB"* stations.
- "USB" memory stick.
- Jukebox*, after first copying audio files to
the internal memory of the system.
- Telephone connected by Bluetooth* and
audio streaming Bluetooth* (streaming).
- Media player connected to the auxiliary
socket (jack, cable not supplied).
* Depending on equipment.
Short-cuts: using the touch buttons in the upper
band of the touch screen tablet, it is possible
to go directly to the selection of audio source,
the list of stations (or titles, depending on the
source).
The screen is of the "resistive" type, it
is necessary to press firmly, particularly
for "flick" gestures (scrolling through a
list, moving the map...). A simple wipe
will not be enough. pressing with more
than one finger is not recognised.
The screen can be used when wearing
gloves. This technology allows use at
all temperatures.
Following prolonged operation in very high
temperatures, the volume may be limited
to protect the system. The return to normal
takes place when the temperature in the
passenger compartment drops.
To clean the screen, use a soft
non-abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth)
without any additional product.
Do not use pointed objects on the
screen.
Do not touch the screen with wet
hands.
Audio and Telematics
256
Steering mounted controls
Activate/deactivate "Black Panel"
mode - black screen (night driving).
Telephone: make a call.
Call in progress: access to the
telephone menu (end call, secret
mode, hands-free mode).
Telephone, press and hold: reject an
incoming call, end a call; when there
is no call in progress, access to the
telephone menu.
MirrorLink
TM
, press and hold: start voice
recognition on your smartphone via the system.
Radio, rotate: select the previous /
next preset station.
Media, rotate: select the previous /
next track.
Press: return to navigation.
Abandon the current operation.
Go up a level (menu or folder).
Display the carrousel of menus.
Increase volume.
Decrease volume.
Mute.
Radio: automatic search for a higher
frequency.
Media: select the next track.
Media, press and hold: fast forward.
Jump in the list.
Radio: automatic search for a lower
frequency.
Media: select the previous track.
Media, press and hold: fast back.
Jump in the list.
Radio: display the list of stations.
Media: display the list of tracks.
Radio, press and hold: update the list
of stations received.
Display the carrousel of
menus.
.
Audio and Telematics
257
Menus
Settings
Radio Media
Navigation
DrivingInternet Telephone
Adjust the settings for sound (balance,
ambience, ...) and the display (date, time, ...).
Select an audio source, a radio station, display
photographs.
Enter navigation settings and choose a
destination.
Access the trip computer.
Activate, deactivate or enter settings for certain
vehicle functions.
Connect using the "Internet browser".
Operate certain applications on your
smartphone via "MirrorLink
TM
".
Connect a telephone by Bluetooth
®
.
(Depending on equipment)
(Depending on equipment)
Audio and Telematics
258
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Navigation
Navigation Route settings
.
Audio and Telematics
259
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Navigation
Navigation
Settings
Enter destination Display recent destinations
Calculatory criteria
Fastest
Choose the navigation criteria.
The map displays the route chosen according to
these criteria.
Shortest
Time/distance
Ecological
Tolls
Ferries
Traf fic
Strict-Close
Show route on map Display the map and start navigation.
Confirm Save the options.
Save current location Save the current address.
Stop navigation Delete the navigation information.
Voice synthesis
Choose the volume for voice and announcement
of street names.
Diversion
Detour from your initial route by a determined
distance.
Navigation
Display in text mode
Zoom in.
Zoom out.
Display in full screen mode.
Use the arrows to move the map.
Switch to 2D map.
Audio and Telematics
260
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
To use the telephone functions,
refer to the "Telephone" section.
For managing contacts and
their addresses, refer to the
"Telephone" section.
Navigation
Address
Enter destination
Contacts
.
Audio and Telematics
261
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Navigation
Secondary page
Enter destination
Address
Curr. location
Address settingsPoints of Interest
Town centre
Save Save the current address.
Add waypoint Add a waypoint to the route.
Navigate to Press to calculate the route.
Contacts
Addresses
Select a contact then calculate the route.
View
Navigate to
Search for contact
Call
From map Display the map and zoom to view the roads.
Itinerary
Create, add or delete a waypoint or view the
itinerary.
Stop Delete navigation information.
Navigate to Press to calculate the route.
Audio and Telematics
262
Search for a point of interest
Navigation
Point of interest displayed on the map
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
.
Audio and Telematics
263
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Navigation
Secondary page
Search for POI
All POIs
List of categories available.
After choosing the category, select the points of
interest.
Garage
Dining/hotels
Personal
Search Save the settings.
Navigation
Secondary page
Show POIs
Select all
Choose the display settings for POIs.Delete
Import POIs
Confirm Save the options.
Audio and Telematics
264
Moving
between
the
two menus.
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Traffic messages
Settings
Diversion
Map settings
Navigation
Map settings
Settings
Settings
.
Audio and Telematics
265
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Navigation
Secondary page
Traffic messages
On the route
Settings for the choice of messages and the
filter radius.
Around vehicle
Near destination
Detour
Detour over a distance
Recalculate route
Finish Save your selections.
Navigation
Secondary page
Map settings
Orientation
Flat view north heading
Choose the display and orientation of the
map.
Flat view vehicle heading
Perspective view
Maps
Aspect
"Day" map colour
"Night" map colour
Automatic day/night
Confirm Save the settings.
Navigation
Secondary page
Settings
Route settings
Enter settings and choose the volume for the
voice and announcement of street names.
Voice
Alert!
Traffic options
Confirm Save your selections.
Audio and Telematics
266
Navigation - Guidance
Choosing a new destination
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Save" to save the address
entered as a contact entry.
The system allows up to 200 entries.
Select "Confirm".
Press "Show route on map" to start
navigation.
Select "Address".
Select the "Country:" from the
list offered, then in the same
way the "City:" or its post
code, the "Road:", the "N°:".
Confirm each time.
Select "Navigate to".
Choose the restriction criteria: "Include
tollroads", "Include ferries", "Traffic",
"Strict", "Close".
Choose the navigation criteria:
"Fastest" or "Shortest" or "Time/
distance" or "Ecological".
To delete navigation information,
press "Settings".
Press "Stop navigation".
To resume navigation press
"Settings".
Press "Resume navigation".
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Towards a new destination
Or
.
Audio and Telematics
267
Towards a recent destination
Select "Enter destination".
Select an address from
the list offered.
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Navigate to".
Towards a contact
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Contacts".
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select a destination from
the contacts in the list
offered.
Select "Navigate to".
Select the criteria then "Confirm" to
start navigation.
To be able to use navigation "towards
a contact in the directory", it is first
necessary to enter the address for your
contact.
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or
press "Show route on map" to start
navigation.
Audio and Telematics
268
Towards GPS coordinates
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Address".
Enter the "Longitude:"
then the "Latitude:".
Select "Navigate to".
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or
press "Show route on map" to start
navigation.
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Towards a point on the map
Select "Enter destination".
Select "From map".
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Zooming in on the map shows points with
information.
A long press on a point opens its content.
Towards points of interest (POI)
Points of Interest (POI) are listed in different
categories.
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Search for POI".
Select "All POIs"
Or
"Garage",
Or
"Dining/hotels",
.
Audio and Telematics
269
An annual mapping update allows
new points of interest to be presented
to you.
You can also update the Risk areas /
Danger areas every month.
The detailed procedure is available on:
http://citroen.navigation.com.
Or
"Personal",
Select a category from the
list offered.
Select "Search".
Select a point of interest
from the list offered.
Select "Navigate to".
Audio and Telematics
270
Hazard zone / Danger zone
alert settings
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Settings".
Select "Alarm!".
It is then possible to activate Risk Areas alerts
then:
- "Audible warning"
- "Alert only when navigating"
- "Alert only for overspeed"
- "Display speed limits"
- Timing: the choice of timing allows the
time before giving a Risk Area alert to be
defined.
Select "Confirm".
This series of alerts and displays is
only available if Risk Areas have first
been downloaded and installed on the
system.
Trafc
Traffic information
Display of messages
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Traffic messages".
Set the:
"On the route",
"Around",
"Near destination", filters to fine-
tune the list of messages.
Press again to remove the filter.
.
Audio and Telematics
271
Select the message from
the list offered.
Select the magnifying glasses to
have vocal information.
Setting lters
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Settings".
Select "Info options".
Select:
- "Warn of new messages",
- "Speak messages".
Then enter the filter radius.
Select "Confirm".
We recommend a filter radius of:
- 12 miles (20 km) in urban areas,
- 30 miles (50 km) on motorways.
TMC (Traffic Message Channel)
messages on GPS-Navigation contain
traffic information transmitted in real
time.
The TA (Traffic Announcement)
function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function
needs good reception of a radio station
transmitting this type of message.
When a traffic report is transmitted,
the current audio source is interrupted
automatically to play the TA message.
Normal playback of the audio source
resumes at the end of the transmission
of the message.
Receiving TA messages
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Settings".
Select "Voice".
Activate / Deactivate
"Traffic (TA)".
Audio and Telematics
272
Radio Media
Level 1 Level 2
List of FM stations
Preset
.
Audio and Telematics
273
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Radio Media
List
List of FM stations Press on a radio station to select it.
Radio Media
Source
FM Radio
Select change of source
DAB Radio
AM Radio
Jukebox
USB
MirrorLink
iPod
Bluetooth
AUX
Radio Media
Preset
Press an empty location to Preset it.
Audio and Telematics
274
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Media
Photos
Manage Jukebox
List of FM stations
Copy to Jukebox
.
Audio and Telematics
275
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Radio Media
Secondary page
Radio list
Preset Press a radio station to select it.
Update list Update the list of stations received.
Frequency Enter the desired radio frequency.
Confirm Save the settings.
Radio Media
Secondary page
Photos
Home screen Display the selected photo in the home page.
Rotate Rotate the photo 90°.
Select all
Select all the photos in the list.
Press again to deselect.
Slideshow
Previous photo.
Display the photos in sequence, full screen.
The system supports the following image
formats: .gif, .jpg, .bmp, .png.
Pause / Play.
Next photo.
Full screen Display the selected photo full-screen.
Radio Media
Secondary page
Manage Jukebox
Sort by folder
Choose a selection mode.Sort by album
Select all
Copy Copy files to the Jukebox.
Magnifying glass
Create folder
Choose the desired function.
Rename
Delete
Select all
Confirm Save the settings.
Audio and Telematics
276
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Media
Settings
Settings
Settings
.
Audio and Telematics
277
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Radio Media
Secondary page
Media list
Presentation of the last media used.
Radio Media
Secondary page
Settings
Media
Settings
Random (all tracks):
Choose the play settings.
Random (current album):
Loop:
Aux. amplification
Radio
Settings
RDS options
Activate or deactivate the settings.
DAB/FM options
Display Radio Text
Digital radio slideshow
display
Announcements
Settings
Traffic announcements (TA)
Activate or deactivate the settings.
News - Weather
Sport - Programm info
Flash - Unforeseen
events
Confirm Save the settings.
Audio and Telematics
278
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Select "Preset".
If necessary, select change of
source.
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Select change source.
"AM Radio".
By automatic frequency search
Select "FM Radio".
"AM Radio".
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Select a preset radio station
in the list.
Select "FM Radio".
Select a radio station from
the list offered.
Select "Update list" to refresh the
list.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "List" in the primary page.
Radio
Changing a radio frequencySelecting a station
To select a preset radio station.
THEN
Radio reception may be affected by
the use of electrical equipment not
approved by CITROËN, such as a USB
charger connected to the 12 V socket.
The exterior environment (hills,
buildings, tunnel, car park, below
ground...) may prevent reception,
even in RDS station tracking mode.
This phenomenon is normal in the
propagation of radio waves and is in no
way indicative of a fault with the audio
system.
Or
Select "Radio list" in the secondary
page.
Or
Press 3 or 4 to move the cursor for an
automatic search down or up for a radio
frequency.
Or
.
Audio and Telematics
279
Select a radio station or frequency (refer to the
corresponding section).
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Settings".
Select "Radio".
Activate/deactivate "RDS
options".
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Press on "Preset".
Select a number in the list to preset the
previously chosen radio station.
A long press on a number presets (memorises)
the station.
Press on Frequency.
Enter the frequency in full
(e.g.: 92.10 MHz) using the keypad
then "Confirm".
Changing radio station
Pressing the name of the current radio station
brings up a list.
To change radio station press the name of the
desired station.
Or
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Select "Save".
Preset a station Activate/ Deactivate RDS
OR
THEN
A press on this button presets all of
the stations one after the other.
Recall pre-set stations
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue
listening to the same station by automatic
retuning to alternative frequencies.
However, in certain conditions, coverage
of an RDS station may not be assured
throughout the entire country as
radio stations do not cover 100 % of
the territory. This explains the loss of
reception of the station during a journey.
Audio and Telematics
280
Display of options:
if active but not available, the display will be greyed out,
if active and available, the display will be blank.
Display of "Radiotext" for
the current station.
Manage the Jukebox.
Display current action.
Select the audio source.
Display the "DAB" band.
Display of the name of the
current station.
Short-cut: access to the choice of audio
source and the list of stations (or titles,
depending on the source). Select the radio station.
Any thumbnail broadcast by
the station.
Preset stations,
buttons 1 to 15.
Short press: select the
preset radio station.
Long press: preset a radio
station.
Next "Multiplex".
Next radio station.
Secondary page.
Display the name and
number of the multiplex
service being used.
Previous "Multiplex".
Previous radio station.
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio
If the "DAB" radio station being listened to is not
available on "FM", the "DAB FM" option is greyed out.
Journaline
®
is a text-based information service designed for digital radio systems.
It provides text-based information structured around topics and sub-topics.
This service is available from the "LIST OF DAB STATIONS" page.
.
Audio and Telematics
281
Select change of source.
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Select "DAB Radio".
Select "List" in the primary page.
Select the radio station from the list offered.
Press on Radio Media to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Settings".
Select "RADIO".
Select "Digital/FM auto
tracking" then "Confirm".
DAB / FM auto trackingDigital radio
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the
territory.
When the digital radio signal is poor,
"DAB / FM auto tracking" allows you to
continue listening to the same station,
by automatically switching to the
corresponding "FM" analogue station
(if there is one).
If "DAB / FM auto tracking" is activated,
there is a difference of a few seconds
when the system switches to "FM"
analogue radio with sometimes a
variation in volume.
When the digital signal is restored, the
system automatically changes back to
"DAB".
Digital radio provides higher quality
reception and also the graphical display
of current information on the radio
station being listened to. Select "List" in
the primary page.
The range of multiplexes available is
displayed in alphabetical order.
If the "DAB" station being listened to
is not available on "FM" ("DAB/FM"
option greyed out), or "DAB / FM auto
tracking" is not activated, the sound
will cut out while the digital signal is too
weak.
or
Select "Radio list" in the secondary
page.
Audio and Telematics
282
Media
USB player Selection of source
Select change of source.
Press on Media to display the
primary page.
The system builds playlists (in temporary
memory), an operation which can take from
a few seconds to several minutes at the first
connection.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
The playlists are updated every time the
ignition is switched off or connection of a USB
memory stick. The lists are memorised: if they
are not modified, the subsequent loading time
will be shorter.
Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port
or connect the USB device to the USB port
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Auxiliary socket (AUX)
Connect the portable device (MP3 player) to
the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable
(not supplied).
First adjust the volume of your portable device
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your
audio system.
Display and management of the controls are
via the portable device.
Choose the source.
.
Audio and Telematics
283
The audio equipment will only play audio
files with ".wma, .aac, .flac, .ogg and. mp3"
file extensions and with a bit rate of between
32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other type of file (.mp4, ...) can be played.
".wma" files must be of the standard wma
9 type.
The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44
and 48 KHz.
It is advisable to restrict file names to
20 characters, without using of special
characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing
and displaying problems.
Information and advice
Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT32
(file allocation table).
The system supports USB mass
storage portable players, BlackBerry
®
devices or Apple
®
players via USB
ports. The adaptor cable not supplied.
Control of the peripheral device is with
the audio system controls.
Other peripherals, not recognised on
connection, must be connected to the
auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not
supplied).
It is recommended that the USB cable
for the portable device is used.
The system does not support the
simultaneous connection of two
identical devices (two memory sticks
or two Apple
®
players) but it is possible
to connect one memory stick and one
Apple
®
player at the same time.
Audio and Telematics
284
Bluetooth
®
audio streaming
Streaming allows audio files on your telephone
to be played through the vehicle's speakers.
Connect the telephone: see the "Telephone"
section, then "Bluetooth".
Choose the "Audio" or "All" profile.
If play does not start automatically, it may be
necessary to start the audio playback from the
telephone.
Control is from the peripheral device or by
using the audio system buttons.
Once connected in streaming mode,
the telephone is considered to be a
media source.
It is recommended that you activate
"Repeat" on the Bluetooth peripheral.
Connecting Apple
®
players
Connect the Apple
®
player to the USB port
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classifications available are those
of the portable device connected
(artists / albums / genres / playlists /
audiobooks / podcasts).
The default classification used is by
artist. To modify the classification used,
return to the first level of the menu
then select the desired classification
(playlists for example) and confirm
to go down through the menu to the
desired track.
The version of software in the audio system
may not be compatible with the generation of
your Apple
®
player.
.
Audio and Telematics
285
Managing the Jukebox
Connect the device (MP3 player...) to the USB
port or auxiliary Jack socket using a suitable
audio cable.
When no audio file is copied to the
system, which has a capacity of 8 GB,
all of the Jukebox function symbols are
greyed and are not available.
Select "Media list".
Select the magnifying glass to enter
the folder or album and select audio
file by audio file.
Select copy "Copy Jukebox".
Select "Confirm" then "Copy".
Select "Sort by folder".
Select "New folder" to create a
folder structure in the Jukebox.
"Sort by album".
Select "Keep structure" to retain the
structure from the device.
While copying the system returns
to the primary page; you can go
back to the copy view at any time by
selecting this button.
Or
Or
Audio and Telematics
286
Level 1
Settings
Level 2 Level 3
Audio settings
Audio settings
Audio settings
.
Audio and Telematics
287
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Settings
Audio settings
Ambience Choose the sound ambience.
Balance Sound distribution using the Arkamys
®
system.
Sound effects
Set the volume or activate the link to vehicle
speed.
Ringtones Set the telephone ringtone and volume.
Voice
Set the volume and voice for speaking street
names
Confirm Save your settings.
Settings
Turn off screen
Function that turns off the display.
Pressing the screen reactivates it.
Audio and Telematics
288
Factory settings
Display screen
Configuration
Adjust date and time
Level 1 Level 2
.
Audio and Telematics
289
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Settings
Secondary page
System settings
Delete data
Select the desired data in the list then press
Delete.
Factory settings Return to factory settings.
Confirm Save the settings.
Settings
Secondary page
Time/Date
Confirm Set the date and time then confirm.
Settings
Secondary page
Screen settings
Activate automatic text scrolling
Activate or deactivate the setting then confirm.Activate animations
Confirm
Audio and Telematics
290
CalculatorConfiguration
Calendar
Level 1 Level 2
.
Audio and Telematics
291
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Settings
Secondary page
Calculator
Select the calculator.
Settings
Secondary page
Calendar
Select the calendar.
Audio and Telematics
292
Audio settings
Press Settings to display the primary
page.
Select "Audio settings".
Select "Ambience".
Or
"Balance".
Or
"Sound effects".
Or
"Ringtones".
Or
"Voice".
On-board audio: Arkamys
©
Sound
Staging optimises sound distribution in
the the passenger compartment.
The distribution (or spatialisation using
the Arkamys
®
system) of sound is an
audio process that allows the audio
quality to be adapted to the number of
passengers in the vehicle.
Available only with the 6-speaker
configuration.
The audio settings (Ambience, Bass,
Treble and Loudness) are different
and independent for each sound
source.
The settings for F-R balance and L-R
balance are common to all sources.
- "Ambience" (choice of 6 musical
ambiences)
- "Bass"
- "Treble"
- "Loudness" (Activate/Deactivate)
- "Balance" ("Driver", "All
passengers", "Front only")
- "Audible response from touch
screen"
- "Volume linked to vehicle
speed:" (Activate/Deactivate)
.
Audio and Telematics
293
Press on Settings to display the
primary page.
Press on "Settings" to display the
primary page.
Press on Settings to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page. Press on the secondary pagePress on the secondary page.
Select "System Settings". Select "Time/Date" to change the
time zone, synchronisation with GPS,
the time and its format, then the date.
Select "Screen settings".
Activate or deactivate "Activate
automatic text scrolling" and
"Activate animations".
Select "Delete data" to delete the
list of recent destinations, personal
points of interest, contacts in the list.
Select "Calculator" to display a
calculator.
Choose the item then select "Delete".
Select "Calendar" to display a
calendar.
Select "Factory settings" to return
to the original settings.
Modifying system settings
Audio and Telematics
294
Internet
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
.
Audio and Telematics
295
Internet browser
Authentication for Internet browsing via
a smartphone is done using the Dial-Up
Networking (DUN) standard.
Press on "Internet browser" to
displays the browser's home page;
first connect your smartphone by
Bluetooth, option "Internet", see the
"Telephone" section.
Some smartphones of the latest
generation do not support this
standard.
Press on Internet to display the
primary page.
Audio and Telematics
296
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
Usage monitor
Internet
Wi-Fi network connection
Bluetooth (devices)
.
Audio and Telematics
297
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Internet
Secondary page
Bluetooth
connection
Search Start the search for a device to connect.
Connect / Disconnect
Start or end the Bluetooth connection to the
selected device.
Update
Import contacts from the selected telephone to
save them in the audio system.
Delete Delete the selected telephone.
Confirm Save the settings.
Internet
Secondary page
Transfer rate
Reset
Reset the usage monitor, them confirm.
Confirm
Internet
Secondary page
WiFi connection
All Display all Wi-Fi networks.
Secure Display secure Wi-Fi networks.
Stored Memorise the selected Wi-Fi network(s).
Add Add a new Wi-Fi network.
Activate / Deactivate Activate or deactivate a Wi-Fi network.
Connect
Select a Wi-Fi network found by the system and
connect to it.
Audio and Telematics
298
MirrorLink
TM
.
Audio and Telematics
299
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the
driver, using a smartphone when
driving is prohibited.
All operations must be done with the
vehicle stationary.
The synchronisation of a personal
smartphone allows applications on a
smartphone that are adapted to the
MirrorLink
TM
technology to be displayed
in the vehicle's screen.
The principles and standards are
constantly evolving; for information
on supported smartphones, go to the
CITROËN website for your country.
Select MyCITROËN if present.
Please note:
- if your mobile is supported, to make
it "MirrorLink
TM
" compatible, some
phone manufacturers nevertheless
invite you to first download a
dedicated application.
- iPhone
®
is not supported yet; an
Apple
®
application, "CarPlay
®
", is
being developed.
When connecting a smartphone to
the system, it is recommended that
Bluetooth
®
be started on the smartphone
Start the application on the
smartphone.
Go to the home page to return to the
"MirrorLink
TM
" display.
During the procedure, a page
showing the conditions for use is
displayed.
Accept to start and end the
connection.
a USB cable is connected. The
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
Press "MirrorLink
TM
" to start
the application in the system.
The "Audio source" and "Telephone"
functions remain available in the margin of the
MirrorLink
TM
display.
MirrorLink
TM
smartphone
connection
Press the end of the lighting control stalk to
start voice recognition of your smartphone via
the system.
Voice recognition requires a compatible
telephone connected to the vehicle by
Bluetooth.
Voice recognition
As a safety measure, applications
can only be viewed with the vehicle
stationary; display is interrupted once
the vehicle is moving.
and
From the system, press "Internet" to
display the primary page.
Audio and Telematics
300
Level 1
Telephone
Level 2 Level 3
Contacts
Call log
.
Audio and Telematics
301
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Telephone
Call log
All calls
After making choices, start the call.
Incoming calls
Outgoing calls
Contacts
Magnifying glass
View
Create
Call
Telephone
Contacts
Addresses
After making choices, start the call.
View
New
Modify
Delete
Delete all
Search for contact
Confirm
Navigate to
Search for contact
Call
Audio and Telematics
302
Bluetooth (devices)
Telephone Options
Devices detected
Telephone connection
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
.
Audio and Telematics
303
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Telephone
connection
Secondary page
Bluetooth
connection
Search
Start the search for another peripheral device to
connect.
Connect Disconnect
Start or stop the Bluetooth connection to the
selected peripheral device.
Update
Import the contacts from the selected telephone
to store them in the audio system.
Delete Delete the selected telephone.
Confirm Save the settings.
Telephone
connection
Secondary page
Search
for devices
Devices detected
Telephone
Start the search for peripheral devices.Audio streaming
Internet
Telephone
connection
Secondary page
Telephone options
Put on hold
Cut the microphone temporarily so that the
contact cannot hear your conversation with a
passenger.
Update
Import the contacts from the selected telephone
to save then in the audio system.
Ringtones Choose the telephone ringtone and volume.
Memory info.
Contact records used and free, percentage of
storage space used by internal contacts and
Bluetooth contacts.
Confirm Save the settings.
Audio and Telematics
304
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
telephone
For reasons of safety and because they
require prolonged attention on the part
of the driver, the operations for pairing
the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the
hands-free system of the audio system
must be carried out with the vehicle
stationary.
Procedure (short) from the
telephone
In the Bluetooth menu of your device, select the
system name in the list of devices detected.
Enter a code of at least 4 figures in the device
and confirm.
Enter this same code in the system,
select "OK" and confirm.
Procedure from the system
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function
and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone
configuration).
Press on Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth connection".
Select Search.
The list of telephones detected is
displayed.
If the telephone is not detected, it is
recommended that you switch the Bluetooth
function on your telephone off and then on again.
Select the name of the
desired peripheral from the
list and "Confirm".
Enter a code of at least 4 figures for
the connection then "Confirm".
Enter this same code in the telephone then
accept the connection.
The system offers to connect the telephone:
- in "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
only),
- in "Audio streaming" (streaming: wireless
playing of audio files from the telephone),
- in "Internet" (internet browsing, only if your
telephone is compatible with the "DUN"
Dial-Up Networking Bluetooth standard).
Select one or more profiles and confirm.
.
Audio and Telematics
305
The services available depend on
the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone
used. Check the telephone manual and
with your network provider for details of
the services available to you.
The ability of the system to connect
with only one profile depends on the
telephone. The three profiles may all
connect by default.
Visit www.citroen.co.uk for more information
(compatibility, additional help, ...).
The recognised telephone
appears in the list.
Depending on your telephone, you may be
asked to accept automatic connection every
time the ignition is switched on.
On return to the vehicle, if the last telephone
connected is present again, it is reconnected
automatically and within around 30 seconds
after switching on the ignition the pairing is
done without any action on your part, with
(Bluetooth activated).
To modify the automatic connection mode,
select the telephone in the list then select the
desired profile.
Depending on the type of telephone,
the system will ask you to accept or not
the transfer of your contacts.
If not, select "Update".
Connecting a Bluetooth
®
peripheral device
Automatic reconnection
On switching on the ignition, the telephone
connected when the ignition was last switched
off is automatically reconnected, if this
connection mode had been activated during the
pairing procedure.
The connection is confirmed by the display of a
message and the name of the telephone.
Manual connection
Press on Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth" to display the list
of paired peripherals.
Select the peripheral to connect.
Press on "Search".
The connection is confirmed by the display of a
message and the name of the telephone.
Audio and Telematics
306
Managing paired
telephones
This function allows the connection or
disconnection of a peripheral device as
well as the deletion of a pairing.
Using the telephone is not
recommended while driving.
Park the vehicle.
Make the call using the steering
mounted controls.
Press on Telephone to display the
primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth" to display the list
of paired peripheral devices.
Select the peripheral in the list.
Select "Search for devices".
Or
"Connect / Disconnect" to start or
end the Bluetooth connection with
the selected device.
Or
"Delete" to delete the pairing.
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a
superimposed display in the screen.
Make a short press on the steering
mounted TEL button to accept an
incoming call.
Make a long press
on the steering mounted TEL button
to reject the call.
Or
Select "End call".
Making a call
Calling a new number
Press on Telephone to display the
primary page.
Enter the phone number using the
digital keypad.
Press "Call" to start the call.
Calling a contact
Press on Telephone to display the
primary page.
Or make a long press
on the steering mounted TEL button.
.
Audio and Telematics
307
Select "Contacts".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
Select "Call".
Calling a recently used
number
Press on Telephone to display the
primary page.
Select "Call log".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.
It is always possible to make a call
directly from the telephone; park the
vehicle first as a safety measure.
Managing contacts /
entries
Press on Telephone to display the
primary page.
Select "Contacts".
Select "Add contact".
Select "Create" to add a new contact.
Or
"Modify" to edit the selected contact.
Or
"Delete" to delete the selected
contact.
Or
"Delete all" to delete all information
for the selected contact.
Select "Directory information"
for the number of entries used,
available, ...
Audio and Telematics
308
The table below gives answers to the most frequently asked questions on your audio system.
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The route calculation is
not successful.
The navigation settings may conflict with the current location
(exclusion of toll roads on a toll motorway).
Check the settings in the "Navigation" menu.
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The Hazard zone audible
warning does not work.
The audible warning is not active. Activate audible warnings in the "Navigation"
menu.
The system does not
suggest a detour around
an incident on the route.
The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages. Select the "Traffic info" function in the list of
guidance criteria.
I receive a Accident-prone
area alert which is not on
my route.
Other than guidance, the system announces all Hazard zone
positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide
an alert for a Hazard zone located on nearby or parallel roads.
Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of
the Accident-prone area. Select "On the route" to
no longer receive alerts other than guidance or to
reduce the time for the announcement.
Frequently asked questions
Navigation
.
Audio and Telematics
309
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Certain traffic jams along
the route are not indicated
in real time.
On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to
receive the traffic information.
Wait until the traffic information is being received
correctly (display of the traffic information icons
on the map).
The filters are too restrictive. Modify the "Geographic filter" settings.
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for
the traffic information.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the traffic information available.
The altitude is not
displayed.
On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to
receive more than 4 satellites correctly.
Wait until the system has completed starting
up, so that there is GPS coverage of at least
4 satellites.
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the
weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.
This phenomenon is normal. The system
is dependent on the GPS signal reception
conditions.
Audio and Telematics
310
Radio
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The quality of reception of
the radio station listened
to gradually deteriorates
or the stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station
listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area
through which the vehicle is travelling.
Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
short-cut menu to enable the system to check
whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...)
block reception, including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not
indicate a fault with the audio system.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.
I cannot find some radio
stations in the list of
stations received.
The station is not received or its name has changed in the list. Press and hold the "List" button at the steering
mounted controls to update the list of stations
received or press the "Update list" function in the
system.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name
(the title of the song for example).
The system interprets this information as the name of the station.
The name of the radio
station changes.
.
Audio and Telematics
311
Media
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Playback of my USB
memory stick starts only
after a very long wait
(around 2 to 3 minutes).
Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down
access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the
catalogue time).
Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
structure on the memory stick.
When I connect my iPhone
as telephone and to the
USB port at the same
time, I am unable to play
the music files.
When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces
the streaming function. The streaming function takes the place
of the USB function which is then not useable, there is a period
without sound of the track being played with Apple
®
players.
Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port (the
USB function takes priority over streaming).
Some characters in the
media information are not
displayed correctly while
playing.
The audio system does not display some types of characters. Use standard characters to name tracks and
folders.
Playing of streaming files
does not start.
The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device.
The names of tracks and
the track length are not
displayed on the screen
when streaming audio.
The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.
Audio and Telematics
312
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
In changing the setting
of treble and bass the
equalizer setting is
deselected.
The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the balance settings.
Modifying one without the other is not possible.
Modify the balance or equalizer settings to obtain
the desired musical ambience.
In changing the equalizer
setting, treble and bass
return to zero.
When changing the
balance settings, the
distribution setting is
deselected.
The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings.
Modifying one without the other is not possible.
Modify the balance or distribution settings to
obtain the desired musical ambience.
When changing a sound
distribution setting,
the balance setting is
deselected.
Settings
.
Audio and Telematics
313
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
There is a difference in
sound quality between the
different audio sources.
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Volume, Bass,
Treble, Equalizer and Loudness can be adapted to the different
sound sources, which may result in audible differences when
changing source.
Check that the audio settings for (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Equalizer, Loudness) are adapted to the
sources listened to. It is advisable to set the
audio functions (Bass, Treble, Fr-Re balance,
Le-Ri balance) to the middle position, select the
"Linear", musical ambience and set the loudness
correction to the "Inactive" position in radio
mode.
With the engine off, the
system switches off after a
few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time
depends on the state of charge of the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode
and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
Audio and Telematics
314
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
I cannot connect my
Bluetooth telephone.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the
telephone may not be visible.
- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth
function is switched on.
- Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. You can check the compatibility of your
telephone at www.citroen.co.uk (services).
The volume of the
telephone connected
in Bluetooth mode is
inaudible.
The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio system, to
maximum if required, and increase the volume of
the telephone if necessary.
The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of
telephone communication.
Reduce the ambient noise level (close the
windows, reduce the booster fan speed, slow
down, ...).
Some contacts are
duplicated in the list.
The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the
contacts on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both.
When both synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be
duplicated.
Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
telephone contacts".
Contacts are not shown in
alphabetical order.
Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings
chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order.
Modify the display setting in the telephone
directory.
The system does not
receive SMS text messages.
The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages
to the system.
Telephone
.
Audio and Telematics
315
Audio system
Audio system / Bluetooth
®
Contents
First steps 316
Steering mounted controls 317
Menus 318
Radio 318
Media 320
Telephone 324
Screen menu map(s) 326
Frequently asked questions 329
Your Audio system is coded in such a way that it will only operate
in your vehicle.
As a safety measure, the driver must only carry out operations
which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the
battery, the audio equipment may switch off after a few minutes.
Audio and Telematics
316
First steps
* Available according to version.
On / Off, volume setting.
Select source:
Radio; USB; AUX; CD; Streaming.
Display the list of local stations.
Long press: CD tracks or MP3 folders
(CD / USB).
Select the screen display mode:
Date, audio functions, trip computer,
telephone.
Audio settings:
Front/rear fader, left/right balance,
bass/treble, loudness, audio
ambiences.
The DARK button changes the
screen display for improved driving
comfort at night.
1
st
press: upper bar only illuminated.
2
nd
press: black screen.
3
rd
press: return to standard display.
Select next frequency down/up.
Select previous/next MP3 folder.
Select previous/next folder / genre /
artist / playlist (USB).
Abandon the current operation.
Confirm.
Buttons 1 to 6
Select a pre-set radio station.
Long press: pre-set a station.
Automatic frequency search down/
up.
Select previous/next CD, MP3 or
USB track.
Eject CD.
Display main menu.
TA (Traffic Announcements) on/off.
Long press: PTY* (radio Programme
TYpe).
Selection of AM / FM wavebands.
.
Audio and Telematics
317
Steering mounted controls
Activate/deactivate "Black Panel" -
black screen mode (night driving).
Telephone: make a call.
Call in progress: access to the
telephone menu (display the calls
log).
Telephone, press and hold: reject an
incoming call.
Radio, rotate: select the previous /
next preset station.
Media, rotate: select the genre /
artist / folder in the classification list.
Press: Access to short-cut menus
depending on the display in the
screen, confirm a selection.
Abandon the current operation.
Go up one level (menu or folder).
Access to the main menu.
Increase volume.
Decrease volume.
Mute.
Radio: automatic search for a higher
frequency.
Media: select the next track.
Media, press and hold: fast forward.
Radio: automatic search for a lower
frequency.
Media: select the previous track.
Media, press and hold: fast back.
Radio: display the list of stations.
Media: display the list of tracks.
Radio, press and hold: update the list
of stations received.
Audio and Telematics
318
Menus
Screen C
Audio functions
Radio; CD; USB; AUX.
Trip computer
Enter distances; Alerts: Status of
functions.
Bluetooth
®
: Telephone - Audio
Pairing; Hands-free kit; Streaming.
Personalisation-configuration
Vehicle parameters; Display;
Languages.
For an overview of the menus available,
refer to the "Screen menu map"
section.
Radio
Selecting a station
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select the
radio.
Press the BAND AST button to
select a waveband.
Briefly press one of the buttons to
carry out an automatic search of the
radio stations.
Press one of the buttons to carry out
a manual search up / down for radio
frequencies.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to
display the list of stations received
locally (30 stations maximum).
To update this list, press for more
than two seconds.
.
Audio and Telematics
319
RDS
The external environment (hills,
buildings, tunnels, basement car
parks, ...) may block reception,
including in RDS mode. This is a
normal effect of the way in which radio
waves are transmitted and does not
indicate any failure of the audio system.
Press the MENU button.
Select "Audio functions".
Press OK.
Select the "FM waveband
preferences" function.
Press OK.
Select "Activate RDS".
Press OK, RDS is displayed in the
screen.
In "Radio" mode, press OK directly to activate /
deactivate RDS mode.
RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue
listening to the same station by automatic
retuning to alternative frequencies.
However, in certain conditions, coverage
of an RDS station may not be assured
throughout the country as radio stations
do not cover 100 % of the territory. This
explains the loss of reception of a station
that can occur during a journey.
Receiving TA messages
Press the TA button to activate or
deactivate traffic messages.
The TA (Traffic Announcement)
function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function
needs good reception of a radio station
transmitting this type of message.
When a traffic report is transmitted, the
current audio source (Radio, CD, ...)
is interrupted automatically to play the
TA message. Normal playback of the
audio source resumes at the end of the
transmission of the message.
Audio and Telematics
320
Media
USB player
This unit consists of a USB port
and an auxiliary Jack socket,
depending on model.
Insert a USB memory stick into the USB port
or connect a USB peripheral device to the USB
port using a suitable cable (not supplied).
The system creates playlists
(temporary memory), which can take
from a few seconds to several minutes
on the first connection.
Reducing the number of non-music
files and the number of folders reduces
this waiting time. Playlists are updated
every time the ignition is switched off or
a USB memory stick is connected.
The lists are memorised: if the lists are
not changed, the subsequent loading
time is reduced.
Press and hold REFRESH LIST to
display the different classifications.
Select by "Folder" / "Artist" /
"Genre" / "Playlist".
Press OK to select the classification
required, then press OK again to
confirm.
Press REFRESH LIST briefly to
display the previously selected
classification.
Navigate through the list using the
left/right and up/down buttons.
Confirm the selection by
pressing OK.
Press one of these buttons to gain
access to the previous / next track in
the list.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or back.
Press one of these buttons to
gain access to the previous / next
"Folder" / "Artist" / "Genre" /
"Playlist" in the list.
.
Audio and Telematics
321
Auxiliary socket (AUX)
Connect the portable device (MP3 player, …) to
the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable
(not supplied).
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select AUX.
First adjust the volume on your portable device
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume on
your audio system. Operation of controls is via
the portable device.
Do not connect a device to both the
Jack auxiliary socket and the USB port
at the same time.
CD player
Insert circular compact discs only.
Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs
or CDs copied using a personal recorder, may
cause faults which are no reflection on the
quality of the vehicle’s player.
Insert a CD in the player, play begins
automatically.
To play a disc which has already
been inserted, press the SOURCE
button several times in succession
and select CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to
display the list of tracks on the CD.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or fast back.
Audio and Telematics
322
The audio system will only play files with
the extension ".mp3" with a sampling rate of
22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of file
(.wma, .mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
It is advisable to restrict file names to
20 characters without using special characters
(e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying
problems.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or
CDRW, when recording, the ISO 9660 level 1. 2
or Joliet file format is recommended.
If the disc is recorded in another format, it may
not be played correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording
format is always used for an individual disc,
with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
Joliet format is recommended.
Information and advice
To play a disc which has already
been inserted, press the SOURCE
button several times in succession
and select CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
folder on the CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to
display the list of directories of the
MP3 compilation.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward play.
Playing an
MP3 CD compilation
Insert an MP3 CD compilation in the player.
The audio equipment searches for all of the
music tracks, which may take anything between
a few seconds and several tens of seconds,
before play begins.
On a single disc, the CD player can
read up to 255 MP3 files spread over
8 folder levels. However, it is advisable
to keep to a limit of two levels to reduce
the access time before the CD is
played.
While the CD is being played, the folder
structure is not followed.
All of the files are displayed on a single
level.
.
Audio and Telematics
323
Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT32
(File Allocation Table).
It is recommended that you use
genuine Apple
®
USB cables for correct
operation.
* In certain cases, play of the audio files must
be initiated from the keypad.
** If the telephone supports the function.
Bluetooth
®
audio streaming
Streaming allows music files on the telephone
to be played via the audio system.
Connect the telephone: see the "Telephone"
section.
Select in the "Bluetooth: Telephone - Audio"
menu the telephone to be connected.
The audio system connects to a newly paired
telephone automatically.
Control of tracks to be played is via the buttons
on the audio system control panel and the
steering mounted controls**. The contextual
information can be displayed in the screen.
Activate the streaming source by
pressing the SOURCE button*.
Connecting Apple
®
players
Connect the Apple
®
player to the USB port
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classifications available are those of the
portable device connected (artists / albums /
genres / playlists / audiobooks / podcasts).
The version of software in the audio system
may not be compatible with the generation of
your Apple
®
player.
Audio and Telematics
324
Telephone
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
telephone
Screen C
(Available according to model and version)
As a safety measure and because they
require prolonged attention on the part
of the driver, the operations for pairing
of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with
the Bluetooth hands-free system of
your audio equipment must be carried
out with the vehicle stationary and the
ignition on.
Go to www.citroen.co.uk for more information
(compatibility, more help, ...).
Activate the telephone’s Bluetooth function
and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone
configuration).
Press the MENU button.
In the menu, select:
- "Bluetooth: Telephone - Audio"
- "Bluetooth configuration"
- "Perform a Bluetooth search"
A window is displayed with a message that a
search is in progress.
The services available depend on
the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth device
used.
Consult your telephone’s manual and
your operator to find out which services
are available to you.
* If your telephone is fully compatible.
The first 4 telephones recognised are displayed
in this window.
The "Telephone" menu permits access to the
following functions in particular: "Directory"*,
"Calls list", "Consult the paired equipment".
Select the telephone to be connected from the
list. Only one telephone can be connected at
a time.
A virtual keypad is displayed in the screen:
enter a code with at least 4 digits.
Confirm by pressing OK.
A message in the screen indicates the telephone
chosen. To accept the pairing, enter the same
code on the telephone, then confirm with OK.
If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not
limited.
A message that the pairing has been
successful appears in the screen.
The automatic connection authorised is only
active after the telephone has been configured.
The directory and the call list can be accessed
after the necessary synchronisation period.
.
Audio and Telematics
325
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a
superimposed display in the screen.
Select the YES tab on the display
using the buttons.
Confirm by pressing OK.
Press this button at the steering
mounted controls to accept the call.
Making a call
From the "Bluetooth: Telephone - Audio"
menu.
Select "Manage the telephone call".
Select "Call".
Or
Select "Calls list".
Or
Select "Directory".
Press this button for more than two
seconds for access to your directory,
then navigate using the thumb wheel.
Or
To dial a number, use your telephone’s keypad,
with the vehicle stationary.
Ending a call
During a call, press this button for
more than 2 seconds.
Confirm with OK to end the call.
The system accesses the telephone’s
contacts directory, depending on its
compatibility, and while it is connected
by Bluetooth.
With certain telephones connected by
Bluetooth you can send a contact to the
directory of the audio system.
Contacts imported in this way are
saved in a permanent directory
visible to all, whatever the telephone
connected.
The menu for the directory is not
accessible if it is empty.
Audio and Telematics
326
Screen menu map(s)
Screen C
Press the OK dial for access to
short-cut menus according to the
display on the screen.
activate / deactivate RDS
activate / deactivate REG mode
activate / deactivate radiotext
Radio
activate / deactivate Intro
CD / MP3 CD
activate / deactivate track repeat
(the entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
activate / deactivate random play
(the entire current CD for CD, the entire
current folder for MP3 CD)
activate / deactivate track repeat (of the
current folder / artist / genre / playlist)
USB
activate / deactivate random play (of the
current folder / artist / genre / playlist)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
.
Audio and Telematics
327
Screen C
Audio functions
Alternative frequencies (RDS)
Activate / deactivate
FM preferences
Regional mode (REG)
Activate / deactivate
Radio-text information (RDTXT)
Activate / deactivate
1
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
Play modes
Album repeat (RPT)
Activate / deactivate
Track random play (RDM)
Activate / deactivate
2
3
4
3
4
Enter distance to destination
1
1
1
2
2
2
Pressing the MENU button displays:
Audio functions
Trip computer
Distance: x miles
Vehicle diagnosis
Warning log
Systems activated or deactivated
State of systems
Audio and Telematics
328
Bluetooth conguration
1 1
1
2 2
2 2
2
3
3
3
2
3
Normal video
Brightness-video adjustment
Display conguration
Dene the vehicle parameters*
Inverse video
Brightness (- +) adjustment
Date and time adjustment
Setting the day/month/year
Setting the hour/minute
Choice of 12 h / 24 h mode
Choice of units
l/100 km - mpg - km/l
°Celsius / °Fahrenheit
1
1
3
3
2
3
2
3
3
2
3
3
3
Personalisation-
conguration
Bluetooth: Telephone -
Audio
Telephone function
Delete a paired equipment
Connect/Disconnect an equipment
Audio Streaming function
Consult the paired equipment
Perform a Bluetooth search
Calls list
Call
Directory
Terminate the current call
Manage the telephone call
Activate secret mode
* The settings vary according to vehicle.
Choice of language
1
.
Audio and Telematics
329
The table below gives answers to the most frequently asked questions on your audio system.
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
With the engine off, the
audio system switches off
after a few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the audio system operating time
depends on the state of charge of the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy
mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle’s
battery.
Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the battery
charge.
The message "the audio
system is overheated"
appears on the display.
In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature
is too high, the audio system switches to an automatic thermal
protection mode leading to a reduction in volume or CD play
stopping.
Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to
allow the system to cool.
Frequently asked questions
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
There is a difference in
sound quality between the
different audio sources
(radio, CD...).
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound
sources, which may result in audible differences when changing
source (radio, CD...).
Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
the audio functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the musical ambience "None"
and set the loudness correction to the "Active"
position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position
in radio mode.
Radio
Audio and Telematics
330
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the BAND AST button to return to the
waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the
stations are stored.
The traffic announcement
(TA) is displayed. I do
not receive any traffic
information.
The radio station is not part of the regional traffic information
network.
Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic
information.
The quality of reception of
the radio station listened
to gradually deteriorates
or the stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station
listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area
through which the vehicle is travelling.
Activate the RDS function to enable the system
to check whether there is a more powerful
transmitter in the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, underground car parks...)
block reception, including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not
indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through an automatic car wash or into an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.
Sound cut-outs of 1 to
2 seconds in radio mode.
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for another
frequency giving better reception of the station.
Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon
is too frequent and always on the same route.
.
Audio and Telematics
331
Media
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The message "USB
peripheral error" is
displayed on the screen.
The Bluetooth connection
is cut.
The battery of the peripheral may not be sufficiently charged. Recharge the battery of the peripheral device.
The USB memory stick is not recognised.
The USB memory stick may be corrupt.
Reformat the USB memory stick.
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain
any audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot
play.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is
not recognised by the audio equipment.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player
the right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD
cannot be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment’s CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The CD player sound is
poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in
suitable conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are
unsuitable.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
Audio and Telematics
332
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
I am unable to access my
voicemail.
Few telephones or service providers allow the use of this function.
Telephone
.
Alphabetical index
333
ABS and EBFD systems ............................... 150
Accessories ..................................................221
AdBlue
®
.........................................................234
Additive, AdBlue ..............................32, 234, 238
Adjusting headlamps .................................... 141
Adjusting head
restraints ...........................................64, 66, 71
Adjusting seat ...........................................64, 65
Adjusting the air
distribution ..............................................76, 80
Adjusting the air flow ................................. 77, 81
Adjusting the date .....................................39, 44
Adjusting the height and reach
of the steering wheel ....................................68
Adjusting the seat belt
height ..........................................................154
Adjusting the temperature ........................75, 80
Adjusting the time .....................................39, 44
Advice on driving ............................................96
Airbags ....................................................35, 157
Airbags, curtain ......................................160-161
Airbags, front......................................... 158, 161
Airbags, lateral ...................................... 160, 161
Air conditioning ......................................... 12, 74
Air conditioning,
digital ............................................................79
Air conditioning,
mono-zone .................................................... 75
Air intake ................................................... 78, 81
Air vents .................................................... 73, 74
Alarm ............................................................... 50
Anti-lock braking
system (ABS) .............................................. 150
Anti-pinch ............................................53, 61, 63
Cable, audio ............................88, 282, 320, 321
Capacity, fuel tank ........................................ 177
Cap, fuel filler ................................................ 177
CD ................................................................. 321
CD, MP3 ........................................................322
Central locking ..........................................46, 55
Changing a bulb .....................................193-203
Changing a fuse .................................... 204-209
Changing a wheel ..................................185-191
Changing a wiper blade ................................ 147
Changing the remote
control battery...............................................48
CHECK ............................................................20
Checking the engine
oil level ..................................................24, 227
Checking the levels .......................227, 229, 230
Checks ...................................................225-241
Checks, routine ......................................231-233
Child lock ....................................................... 176
Children .......................................... 156, 162-176
Child seats ............................................ 162-175
Child seats, conventional ......................168, 169
Child seats, ISOFIX .......................172, 174, 175
CITROËN Connect Box ............................... 251
A
B
C
Battery ............................................210-212, 231
Battery, charging ........................................... 212
Battery, remote control .............................48, 49
Blanking screen
(snow shield) ...............................................220
Blind, panoramic
sunroof .......................................................... 62
Blinds, side ......................................................90
Blue HDi ................................................ 114, 234
Bluetooth (hands-free) ..........................300, 324
Bluetooth (telephone) ............................300, 324
Bolts, wheel security .....................................188
Bonnet ...........................................................224
Boot ...........................................................58, 59
Boot (fittings) ............................................. 91, 92
Brake discs ....................................................233
Brake lamps .......................................... 197, 199
Brakes ...........................................................233
Anti-theft .........................................................97
Armrest, front .................................................. 88
Armrest, rear ...................................................89
Assistance call ...................................... 149, 251
Audible warning .................................... 121, 149
Audio streaming
(Bluetooth) ..........................................284, 323
Audio system ................................................. 315
Auxiliary ..................................88, 282, 320, 321
Braking assistance
system ......................................................... 150
Bulbs (changing) ....................................193-203
Alphabetical index
334
Emergency warning
lamps .......................................................... 148
Emissions control system,
SCR ......................................................33, 234
Energy economy
mode ........................................................... 213
Engine compartment ............................225, 226
Engine, Diesel .......................179, 226, 244, 245
Engine, petrol ........................179, 225, 242, 243
Environment .............................................. 12, 49
Deactivating the passenger
airbag .......................................................... 158
Deadlocking .................................................... 47
Demisting/defrosting,
front ......................................................... 77, 82
Demisting/defrosting, rear ........................78, 82
Diesel ............................................................ 179
Dimensions ................................................... 246
Dipstick ....................................................24, 227
Direction indicators .......................148, 195, 199
Display screen,
instrument panel ..............................14, 17, 114
Display screen,
multifunction ................................................. 37
Doors ............................................................... 55
Driving economically....................................... 12
Driving positions (storing) ............................... 67
Dynamic stability control (DSC) .............. 29, 151
CITROËN Localised
Emergency Call .................................. 149, 251
Closing the boot ..............................................46
Closing the doors ......................................46, 55
Configuration,
vehicle ............................... 15, 37, 42, 286, 328
Connection, Bluetooth ......... 296, 304, 305, 324
Connection, MirrorLink .................................299
Connection, Wi-Fi network ...........................296
Control, electric windows ................................ 53
Control, emergency
boot release ..................................................58
Control, emergency door ................................ 57
Control, heated seats ......................................66
Control, panoramic
sunroof blind ................................................. 62
Control stalk, lighting .............................136-140
Control stalk, wipers ..............................144-146
Courtesy lamps ............................................... 83
Cover, load space ...........................................93
Cruise control ................................................ 125
Cup holder .................................................88, 89
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) -
Digital radio .........................................280, 281
Date (setting) .............................................39, 44
Daytime running lamps ......................... 139, 193
Deactivating ESP .......................................... 152
D
Eco-driving ..................................................... 12
Economy
mode ........................................................... 213
Electronic brake force distribution
(EBFD) ........................................................ 150
Emergency braking assistance
(EBA) .......................................................... 150
Emergency call ..................................... 149, 251
E
Filling the fuel tank ................................. 177-179
Filter, air ........................................................ 231
Filter, oil ......................................................... 231
Filter, particle ........................................230, 232
Filter, passenger
compartment .............................................. 231
Fitting a wheel ...............................................190
Fitting roof bars ............................................. 218
Fittings, boot .............................................91, 92
Fittings, interior ...............................................86
Fittings, rear ....................................................89
Flap, fuel filler .........................................177, 178
Flashing indicators ........................................ 148
Foglamps, front ..................................... 137, 196
Foglamps, rear ...............................137, 197, 199
Folding the rear seats ..................................... 71
Frequency (radio) .......................... 278, 279, 318
F
.
Alphabetical index
335
Identification, vehicle ....................................250
Ignition .............................................................97
Immobiliser, electronic ..............................49, 97
Indicator, coolant temperature ........................ 21
Indicator, engine oil level ........................24, 227
Indicator, engine oil temperature .................... 21
Indicator lamps, operation ........................ 26-36
Indicators, direction ...................................... 148
Inflating tyres ..........................................12, 250
Instrument panels ........................................... 14
Internet ..........................................................294
Internet browser ............................................295
Isofix mountings ............................................ 172
Hazard warning lamps,
automatic operation .................................... 148
Headlamp adjustment ................................... 141
Headlamps, automatic
illumination ...........................................137, 140
Headlamps, dipped beam ..................... 136, 193
Headlamps, directional ......................... 141, 143
Headlamps, main beam ........................ 136, 193
Headlamps, Xenon .......................................193
Headlamp wash ............................................ 145
Head restraints, front ................................64, 66
Head restraints, rear ....................................... 71
Heating ................................................ 74, 75, 79
Hill start assist ...............................................108
Horn...............................................................149
I
J
K
Jack ............................................................... 185
Jukebox .........................................................285
Key with remote
control ............................................... 45-49, 97
Kit, hands-free ......................................300, 324
Kit, temporary puncture
repair ........................................................... 181
L
Labels, identification .....................................250
Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS) .......................................... 128
Level, AdBlue
®
additive .................................234
Level, brake fluid ...........................................229
Level, Diesel additive ....................................230
Level, engine coolant .............................. 21, 229
Level, engine oil ......................................24, 227
Level, headlamp
wash ............................................................230
Level, power steering
fluid .............................................................229
Levels and checks ................................ 225-230
Fuel...................................................12, 177, 179
Fuel consumption ............................................ 12
Fuel tank........................................................ 178
Fusebox, battery
compartment ..............................................204
Fusebox, dashboard .....................................205
Fusebox, engine
compartment ..............................................208
Fuses .............................................................204
G
Gauge, fuel.............................................. 21, 177
Gearbox,
automatic .......................12, 110, 115, 212, 232
Gearbox, manual .................... 12, 109, 115, 232
Gear efficiency
indicator ...................................................... 114
Gear lever, automatic
gearbox ....................................................... 110
Gear lever, manual
gearbox ....................................................... 109
Glove box ........................................................86
H
Hazard warning
lamps .......................................................... 148
Alphabetical index
336
Level, screenwash fluid ................................230
Lighting ............................................................84
Lighting, dashboard ........................................ 25
Lighting dimmer ..............................................25
Lighting, directional ............................... 142, 143
Lighting, guide-me home ...................... 139, 140
Lighting, interior ..............................................83
Lighting, mood ................................................84
Lighting, welcome ...........................................84
Loading ........................................................... 12
Localised Assistance Call ..................... 149, 251
Locating your vehicle ......................................48
Locking from
the inside ......................................................55
Log, alerts .......................................................20
Oil change .....................................................227
Oil consumption ............................................ 227
OIl, engine .....................................................227
Opening the bonnet ......................................224
Opening the boot ............................................45
Opening the doors ....................................45, 55
Opening the fuel
filler flap ...................................................... 177
Opening the panoramic
sunroof blind ................................................. 62
Opening the sunroof ....................................... 61
O
P
Pads, brake ...................................................233
Paint colour code .......................................... 250
Panoramic glass sunroof ................................62
Parking brake ................................ 100, 101, 233
Parking brake, electric .................................. 101
Parking sensors, front ................................... 131
Parking sensors, rear.................................... 131
Parking space sensors ................................ 129
Petrol ............................................................. 179
Plates, identification......................................250
Player, Apple
®
.......................................284, 323
Player, MP3 CD ..................................... 321, 322
Player, USB ...........................................282, 320
Port, USB ........................................88, 282, 320
Pressures, tyres ............................................250
Priming the fuel
system ......................................................... 180
Protecting
children ........................................ 156, 162-176
Puncture ........................................................ 181
Mirrors, door....................................................69
Misfuel prevention ......................................... 178
Mountings,
Isofix ........................................................... 172
MP3 CD .........................................................322
M
Maintenance, routine ...................................... 12
Map reading lamps .........................................83
Markings, identification .................................250
Massage function ...........................................66
Mat ..................................................................87
Menu ................... 258, 260, 264, 272, 274, 276,
286, 288, 290, 300, 302
Menu, main ............................................. 15, 318
Menus (audio) ........................................272-277
Menus (Touch screen
tablet) ..................................................253, 257
Mirror, rear view .............................................. 70
Navigation ..............................................258-271
Net, high load
retaining ........................................................94
Number plate lamps ...................................... 201
N
Radio ..................................................... 278, 318
Radio, digital (Digital Audio
Broadcasting - DAB) ...........................280, 281
RDS ....................................................... 279, 319
Reading lamps, rear ........................................ 83
Recharging the battery ......................... 210, 212
Recirculation, air ....................................... 78, 81
R
.
Alphabetical index
337
Speed limiter ................................................. 122
Speedometer .................................................. 14
Starting the engine ......................................... 97
Station,
radio .................................................... 278, 318
Stay, bonnet .................................................. 224
Steering mounted controls,
audio ................................................... 256, 317
Steering wheel,
adjustment ....................................................68
Steering wheel, fixed centred
controls ....................................................... 120
Stop & Start .................................19, 77, 82, 115,
177, 210, 224, 231
Storage ............................................................86
Storing driving
positions........................................................ 67
Stowing rings .................................................. 91
Sun visor .........................................................86
Suspension,
Hydractive III+ .............................................134
Switching off
the engine ..................................................... 97
Synchronising the remote
control ...........................................................48
Safety, children .............................. 156, 162-176
Screen, cold
climate ........................................................220
Screen, instrument
panel ..........................................15, 17, 20, 120
Screen menu ....... 258, 260, 264, 272, 274, 276,
286, 288, 290, 300, 302
Screen, multifunction
monochrome C ............................. 37, 318, 326
Screenwash,
front ............................................................. 145
Screenwash,
rear .............................................................. 145
SCR system ..................................................234
Seat belts .......................................154-156, 168
Seats, front ..........................................64, 65, 67
Seats, heated ............................................64, 66
Seats, rear ....................................................... 71
Serial number,
vehicle .........................................................250
Service indicator .......................................22, 23
Servicing ................................................... 12, 23
Settings, equipment .................... 15, 37, 42, 326
Settings
(Menus) ...................................... 286, 288, 290
Settings, system ............................................293
Sidelamps ............................. 136, 193, 197, 199
Side repeater ................................................193
Ski flap ............................................................90
Snow chains .................................................. 192
SNOW MOTION............................................ 151
Socket, 12 volt
accessory ..................................................... 89
Socket, auxiliary ..............................88, 282, 321
Soft distribution ............................................... 73
S
Regeneration of the particle
filter .............................................................232
Reinitialising the electric
windows ........................................................53
Reinitialising the remote
control ...........................................................48
Reinitialising the sunroof ................................ 61
Reminder, key in ignition .................................99
Reminder, lighting on .................................... 139
Remote control ....................................45, 46, 49
Removing a wheel ........................................188
Removing the mat ........................................... 87
Replacing bulbs .....................................193-203
Replacing fuses .................................... 204-209
Replacing the air filter ................................... 231
Replacing the oil filter ................................... 231
Replacing the passenger
compartment filter ...................................... 231
Reservoir, headlamp
wash ............................................................230
Reservoir, screenwash .................................230
Resetting the service
indicator ........................................................23
Resetting the trip recorder .............................. 25
Reset trip ....................................................17, 18
Rev counter ..................................................... 14
Reversing camera ......................................... 133
Reversing lamp ..................................... 197, 199
Risk areas
(update) .......................................................269
Roof bars ....................................................... 218
Roof, opening .................................................. 61
Running out of fuel
(Diesel) .......................................................180
Table of weights ....................................243, 245
Tables of engines ..................................242, 244
Tables of fuses ..............................................204
T
Alphabetical index
338
Tank, AdBlue
®
additive ...............................................234, 239
Tank, fuel ................................................177, 178
Technical data ........................................242-246
Telephone .............................................300, 324
Temperature,
coolant .......................................................... 21
Three flashes
(direction indicators) ................................... 148
Time (setting) ............................................39, 44
TMC (Traffic info) .......................................... 270
Tools .............................................................. 185
Total distance
recorder ........................................................ 25
Touch screen
tablet ...................................18, 40, 42, 43, 253
Towbar ........................................................... 216
Towed loads ..........................................243, 245
Towing another
vehicle ......................................................... 214
Towing eye .................................................... 214
Traction control
(ASR) .................................................... 29, 151
Traffic information
(TA) ..................................................... 271, 319
Traffic information
(TMC) .......................................................... 270
Trailer ............................................................ 216
Trajectory control
systems ....................................................... 151
Trip computer ............................................. 17-19
Trip distance recorder ..................................... 25
Tyres ........................................................12, 250
Tyre under-inflation
detection ............................................. 118, 191
V
Ventilation ................................................. 73, 74
Very cold protection ...................................... 219
W
Warning and indicator
lamps ...................................................... 26-36
Warning lamp, airbag ......................................35
Warning lamp, SCR emissions
control system ..............................................33
Warning lamp,
Service .......................................................... 27
Weights .................................................243, 245
Welcome function ........................................... 67
U
Under-inflation
(detection) ................................................... 118
Unlocking ........................................................ 45
Unlocking from
the inside ......................................................55
Updating risk areas .......................................269
Updating the date ......................................39, 44
Updating the time ......................................39, 44
UREA ....................................................234, 235
USB .................................................88, 282, 320
Wheel, spare ................................................. 186
Window controls .............................................53
Wiper blades
(changing) ................................................... 147
Wiper, rear.....................................................145
Wipers ....................................................144-146
Wipers, automatic rain
sensitive ..............................................144, 146
03-15
Automobiles CITROËN declares, by application of the
provisions of the European regulation (Directive 2000/53)
relating to End of Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives
set by this regulation and that recycled materials are used in
the manufacture of the products that it sells.
We draw your attention to the following
points:
- The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories not
listed by CITROËN may cause faults and failures with the
electrical system of your vehicle. Contact a CITROËN
dealer for information on the range of recommended
accessories.
- As a safety measure, access to the diagnostic socket,
used for the vehicle's electronic systems, is reserved
strictly for CITROËN dealers or qualified workshops,
equipped with the special diagnostic tool required (risk
of malfunctions of the vehicle's electronic systems that
could cause breakdowns or serious accidents). The
manufacturer cannot be held responsible if this advice is
not followed.
- Any modification or adaptation not intended or authorised
by Automobiles CITROËN or carried out without meeting
the technical requirements defined by the manufacturer
would lead to the suspension of the legal and contractual
warranty.
Reproduction or translation of all or part of this document is
prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles
CITROËN.
Labels are fitted in various areas of your vehicle. They carry
safety warnings as well as vehicle identification information.
Do not remove them: they form an integral part of your
vehicle.
Printed in the EU
Anglais
For any work on your vehicle, use a qualified workshop that
has the technical information, competence and equipment
required, which a CITROËN dealer is able to provide.
CRÉATIVE TECHNOLOGIE
2015 – DOCUMENTATION DE BORD
4Dconcept
Diadeis
Interak
15.C5.0030
Anglais
Audio and Telematics
2
Connected services
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
.
Audio and Telematics
3
Internet browser
Authentication for Internet browsing via
a smartphone is done using the Dial-Up
Networking (DUN) standard.
Press on " Internet browser " to
displays the browser's home page;
first connect your smartphone by
Bluetooth, option "Internet", see the
" Telephone " section.
Some smartphones of the latest
generation do not support this
standard.
Press on Connected services to
display the primary page.
Audio and Telematics
4
Level 1 Level 2
Usage monitor
Internet connection settings
Wi-Fi network connection
Bluetooth (devices)
.
Audio and Telematics
5
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Connected
services
Secondary page
Bluetooth
connection
Search Start the search for a device to connect.
Connect / Disconnect
Start or end the Bluetooth connection to the
selected device.
Update
Import contacts from the selected telephone to
save them in the audio system.
Delete Delete the selected telephone.
Confirm Save the settings.
Connected
services
Secondary page
Transfer rate
Reset
Reset the usage monitor, them confirm.
Confirm
Connected
services
Secondary page
WiFi connection
All Display all Wi-Fi networks.
Secure Display secure Wi-Fi networks.
Stored Memorise the selected Wi-Fi network(s).
Add Add a new Wi-Fi network.
Off/
On Activate or deactivate a Wi-Fi network.
Connect
Select a Wi-Fi network found by the system and
connect to it.
Audio and Telematics
6
MirrorLink
TM
Optional depending on the
smartphone and operating
system.
Applications
Car mode
.
Audio and Telematics
7
As a safety measure and because it
requires sustained attention by the
driver, using a smartphone when
driving is prohibited.
All operations must be done with the
vehicle stationary .
The synchronisation of a
smartphone allows applications on a
smartphone that are adapted to the
MirrorLink
TM
technology to be displayed
in the vehicle's screen.
As the principles and standards are
constantly evolving, it is recommended
that you update the operating system of
your smartphone.
For the list of eligible smartphones,
connect to the brand's internet website
in your country.
Please note:
- if your smartphone is supported, to
make it "MirrorLink
TM
" compatible,
some phone manufacturers
nevertheless invite you to first
download a dedicated application.
- iPhone
®
is not supported yet; an
Apple
®
application, "CarPlay
®
", is
being developed.
When connecting a smartphone to
the system, it is recommended that
Bluetooth
®
be started on the smartphone
Start the application on the
smartphone (optional, depending
on the smartphone and operating
system).
Access to the different audio sources remains
accessible in the margin of the MirrorLink
TM
display, using touch buttons in the upper bar.
Access to the menus for the system is possible
at any time using the dedicated buttons
If the smartphone is locked,
communication with the system is only
by USB cable.
During the procedure, several screen
pages relating to certain functions
are displayed.
Accept to start and end the
connection.
Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
Press " MirrorLink
TM
" to start
the application in the system.
Once connection is established, an
" Applications " page is displayed with the
list of applications already downloaded to
your smartphone and adapted to MirrorLink
TM
technology.
If only one application has been downloaded to
the smartphone, it starts automatically.
MirrorLink
TM
smartphone
connection
Press the end of the lighting control stalk to
start voice recognition of your smartphone via
the system.
Voice recognition requires a compatible
smartphone connected to the vehicle by
Bluetooth.
Voice recognition
As a safety measure, applications
can only be viewed with the vehicle
stationary; display is interrupted once
the vehicle is moving.
From the system, press " Connected
services " to display the primary
page.
Audio and Telematics
8
Back
Home
Controls
Connect-App
Car mode
Connect-App
Car mode
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
.
Audio and Telematics
9
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments
Connected
services
MirrorLink
TM
Connect-App
Car mode
Connect-App
Access or return to the list of applications already
downloaded to your smartphone and adapted to
MirrorLink
TM
technology.
Controls
"Back": abandon the current operation, go up
one level.
"Home": access or return to the "Car mode"
page.
Access to the "Connected services" primary
page.
8
Practical information
1
Temporary puncture repair kit
All versions * , except BlueHDi
Diesel
BlueHDi Diesel versions
* Depending on the country of sale.
Access to the kit
This kit is installed in the storage box, under the
boot floor.
This kit consists of a compressor and a sealant
cartridge.
It allows the temporary repair of a tyre.
You are then able to go to the nearest garage.
It is designed to repair most punctures
which could affect the tyre, located on
the tyre tread or shoulder.
Its compressor can be used to check
and adjust the pressure of the tyre.
Practical information
2
Description of the kit
A. "Sealant" or "Air" position selector.
B. On "I" / off "O" switch.
C. Deflation button.
D. Pressure gauge (in bar and psi).
E. Compartment housing:
- a cable with adaptor for 12 V socket,
- various inflation adaptors for
accessories, such as balls, bicycle
tyres...
F. Sealant cartridge.
G. White pipe with cap for repair.
H. Black pipe for inflation.
I. Speed limit sticker.
The speed limit sticker I must be affixed
to the vehicle's steering wheel to remind
you that a wheel is in temporary use.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h) when driving with a tyre
repaired using this type of kit.
The vehicle's electric system allows the
connection of a compressor for long
enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture
repair or for inflating a small inflatable
accessory.
8
Practical information
3
Repair procedure
1. Sealing
) Switch off the ignition.
) Turn the selector A to the
"sealant" position.
) Check that the switch B is in
position "O" .
Avoid removing any foreign bodies
which have penetrated into the tyre.
) Uncoil the white pipe G fully.
) Unscrew the cap from the white pipe.
) Connect the white pipe to the valve of the
tyre to be repaired.
Take care, this product is harmful
(e.g. ethylene-glycol, colophony...) if
swallowed and causes irritation to the
eyes.
Keep this product out of the reach of
children.
) Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
) Start the vehicle and leave the engine
running.
Do not start the compressor before
connecting the white pipe to the tyre
valve: the sealant product would be
expelled through the pipe.
Practical information
4
Tyre under- in ation
detection
If the vehicle is fitted with tyre under-
inflation detection, the under-inflation
warning lamp will remain on after the
wheel has been repaired until the
system is reinitialised by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
) Switch on the compressor by moving
the switch B to position "I" until the tyre
pressure reaches 2.0 bars.
The sealant is injected into the tyre under
pressure; do not disconnect the pipe from
the valve during this operation (risk of
splashing).
) Remove the kit and screw the cap back on
the white pipe.
Take care to avoid staining your vehicle
with traces of fluid. Keep the kit to hand.
) Drive immediately for approximately
three miles (five kilometres), at reduced
speed (between 15 and 35 mph (20 and
60 km/h)), to plug the puncture.
) Stop to check the repair and the tyre
pressure using the kit.
If after around 5 to 7 minutes the
pressure is not attained, this indicates
that the tyre is not repairable; contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop for assistance.
8
Practical information
5
2. In ation
) Turn the selector A to the "air"
position.
) Uncoil the black pipe H fully.
) Connect the black pipe to the valve of the
wheel.
) Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
) Start the vehicle again and leave the
engine running.
As soon as possible, go to a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
You must inform the technician that you
have used this kit. After inspection, the
technician will advise you on whether
the tyre can be repaired or if it must be
replaced.
) Adjust the pressure using the compressor
(to inflate: switch B in position "I" ; to
deflate: switch B in position "O" and press
button C ), in accordance with the vehicle's
tyre pressure label (located on the left
hand door aperture).
A loss of pressure indicates that the
puncture has not been fully plugged;
contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified
workshop for assistance.
) Remove and stow the kit.
) Drive at reduced speed (50 mph [80 km/h]
max) limiting the distance travelled to
approximately 120 miles (200 km).
Practical information
6
Removing the cartridge
) Stow the black pipe.
) Detach the angled base from the white pipe.
) Support the compressor vertically.
) Unscrew the cartridge from the bottom.
Beware of discharges of fluid.
The expiry date of the fluid is indicated
on the cartridge.
The sealant cartridge is designed for
single use; even if only partly used, it
must be replaced.
After use, do not discard the cartridge
into the environment, take it to an
authorised waste disposal site or a
CITROËN dealer.
Do not forget to obtain a new sealant
cartridge, available from CITROËN
dealers or from a qualified workshop.
Checking tyre pressures / inflating accessories
You can also use the compressor, without
injecting any product, to:
- check or adjust the pressure of your tyres,
- inflate other accessories (balls, bicycle
tyres...).
) Turn the selector A to the "Air"
position.
) Uncoil the black pipe H fully.
) Connect the black pipe to the valve of the
wheel or accessory.
If necessary, fit one of the adaptors
supplied with the kit first.
) Connect the compressor's electrical
connector to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
) Start the vehicle and let the engine run.
) Adjust the pressure using the compressor
(to inflate: switch B in position "I" ; to
deflate: switch B in position "O" and press
button C ), according to the vehicle's tyre
pressure label or the accessory's pressure
label.
) Remove the kit then stow it.
347

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Citroen C5 - 2015 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Citroen C5 - 2015 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 33,97 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info